JP5707635B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, it is possible to start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is derived to a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a display result derived to the variable display device.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, bonuses, and replays. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the bonus winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination including the bonus combination to occur, generally, a winning flag must be set by winning an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

  For such a slot machine, the player can obtain the benefit of not having to consume medals for setting the number of bets by winning a replay. Some RTs (Replay Time) that change the winning probability of replay (improve the winning probability) without changing it are determined as a gaming state other than a bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus. Such RT has been completed on condition that a predetermined RT end symbol is stopped on the line (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Further, by performing a predetermined operation, even if the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the game is controlled so as not to be stopped, and the predetermined symbol of the rotating reel is stopped or not stopped on the line in the game disabled state. For example, there is a technique for notifying the operation timing for performing the so-called eye-pushing practice for stopping or not stopping the predetermined symbol on the line (for example, see Patent Document 2).
JP 2006-15000 A Japanese Patent No. 3608724

  In the conventional slot machine described in Patent Document 1, when RT is controlled, by operating the stop button so as not to stop the RT end symbol on the line, at least RT end due to RT end symbol stop is performed. Since this can be avoided, the period controlled by RT can be extended as much as possible. Therefore, during RT, the player operates the stop button so as not to stop the RT end symbol on the line, that is, attempts to remove the RT end symbol.

  However, whether the RT end symbol removal operation was successful or unsuccessful is the state in which the RT end symbol can be stopped on the line and the RT is terminated by the RT end symbol being stopped. It could be judged only by whether the RT end symbol was stopped on the line or not. That is, the result of the RT end symbol removal operation directly affects the continuation or end of RT. For this reason, it is not possible to confirm whether the RT end symbol removal operation is successful or unsuccessful without affecting the continuation or termination of the RT, and it is possible to practice the RT end symbol removal operation. There wasn't.

  In addition, if the RT end symbol removal operation is performed and fails once, RT ends. For this reason, for example, until the next time RT is controlled so that the RT end symbol can be stopped on the line, the player cannot confirm whether the RT end symbol removal operation has succeeded or failed. It was. As a result, since it is necessary to spend a considerable amount of medals to learn the RT end symbol removal operation, it has been impossible to capture a customer base unfamiliar with such operation.

  Therefore, the technical matter that allows the slot machine described in Patent Document 1 to practice the push-up practice described in Patent Document 2 is used, for example, the operation timing for not stopping the RT end symbol on the line in the game invalid state is notified. Thus, it is conceivable to practice the RT end symbol removal operation. However, in this case, since the game is controlled to be in an invalid state at the time of practice, there is a possibility that the operation rate of the slot machine is remarkably reduced.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to make it possible to practice the RT end symbol removal operation without reducing the operating rate and to provide more opportunities for the practice. Is to provide a machine.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) It becomes possible to start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during regular bonus) for one game using game values (medals, credits). The display result is derived to the variable display device that displays the identification information of the game in a variable manner, so that one game is completed, and a slot machine (slot machine 1) that can generate a prize according to the display result derived to the variable display device. )
A plurality of re-game winning display results (replay (1), replay (2)) that allow the next game to be played without using the gaming value before the display result of the variable display device is derived. Pre-determining means (S402) for determining whether or not to allow each type of winning display result to be derived;
Stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to stop the variation display of the identification information;
Derivation control means (S403) for deriving the display result of the variable display device according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation procedure of the stop operation means;
Re-game high-probability state control means (S1009e) for controlling to a re-game high-probability state (RT1) for performing control for deriving the re-game winning display result with a higher probability than the normal game state when a predetermined condition is established; With
The re-game high probability state control means ends the re-game high probability state when a predetermined end display result (single bonus) is derived in the re-game high probability state (S909, S1009h)
The derivation control means is an end display result derivation control means (FIG. 18) capable of deriving the end display result on condition that the predetermined determination is made by the prior determination means (single bonus + melon winning). , See reel control when single bonus is won simultaneously with melon)
The end display result derivation control means is operated by the stop operation means at a specific timing in the game in which the predetermined determination is made (at least in the state where the middle reel 2C is stopped) A special display result ("melon-melon-melon") different from the end display result when the stop button 8L is operated at the timing when the "melon" symbol is positioned at the lower stage),
The derivation control means further includes a re-game winning display result derivation controlling means for deriving the re-game winning display result when the pre-deciding means determines that the derivation of the re-game winning display result is allowed. (Refer to FIG. 18, reel control when replay (1) + replay (2) is won)
In the game (replay (1) + replay (2) winning) in which the re-game winning display result derivation control means is determined not to allow the predetermined determination but to permit the derivation of the re-game winning display result. When the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing, a first specific display result (replay (2), “orange-banana-banana”) among the re-game winning display results is derived, and the specific The timing before and after the timing (the timing before the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 is located in the lower stage for the left reel 2L, and the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 is located in the lower stage for the left reel 2L. The first specific display result among the re-game winning display results when the stop operation means is operated at a timing later than the timing) The second of a particular display the results to be (replay (1), "banana - bananas - bananas") to derive,
It is suggested that the slot machine is a game in which it is determined that the derivation of the re-game winning display result is permitted and whether or not the stop operation means can be operated at the specific timing .

  According to such a configuration, in the game in which the derivation of the re-game winning display result is allowed, the first operation is performed when the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing for deriving the special display result different from the end display result. The specific display result is derived, and when the stop operation means is operated at timings before and after the specific timing, the second specific display result is derived. Thereby, it can be confirmed whether or not the operation could be performed at a specific timing depending on whether or not the first specific display result is derived. For this reason, it is possible to perform an operation practice for operating the stop operation means at a specific timing in a game in which the derivation of the re-game winning display result is allowed without reducing the operating rate of the slot machine.

  When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the re-game high probability state control means controls the re-game high probability state. In the re-game high probability state, control for deriving the re-game winning display result with a higher probability than in the normal game state is performed. On the other hand, the above-described operation practice can be executed in a game in which derivation of the re-game winning display result is allowed. For this reason, when the re-game high probability state is controlled, it is possible to provide more players with a game in which it can be confirmed whether or not the game can be operated at a specific timing.

  In addition, in a game in which it can be confirmed whether or not the operation can be performed at a specific timing, the re-game winning display result is derived even when the operation can be performed at a specific timing. For this reason, the next game can be performed without using the gaming value, and it is possible to substantially prevent the loss of the gaming value.

  Further, when the game is a game (practice game) in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the operation can be performed at a specific timing, and when the game is operated at a specific timing, a first specific display result is derived and specified. If the game is a game (actual game) for avoiding that the end display result is derived by operating at the timing, it is different from the first specific display result when operated at a specific timing. A special display result is derived. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation result at a specific timing is different in the practice game and the actual game. Therefore, the player can easily recognize whether the game is a practice game or a production game from the display result when operated at a specific timing.

  The re-game winning display result deriving control means is a timing different from the specific timing and before and after the specific timing in the game for which the determination to allow the deriving of the re-game winning display result is made. The first specific display result may be derived also when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing different from the timing (see Modification (28)). Even in such a case, if the player operates with a specific timing, whether the first specific display result is derived or not can be operated at a specific timing. Since it can be confirmed whether there was no, it has the same effect as the above effect.

  Further, the first and second specific display results are not limited to the re-game winning display results, and may be any of a plurality of types of winning display results, and are different from predetermined winning display results. It may be a display result. The predetermined off-line display result as the first specific display result is, for example, a specific one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) in which a plurality of re-game winning display results are set in the variable display device. Even if the display result is derived on other winning lines (for example, diagonal lines such as winning lines L4 and L5) when derived on the winning line (for example, horizontal lines such as winning lines L1 to L3). Good. In this case, the re-game winning display result derivation control means is operated when the stop operation means is operated at the specific timing in the game in which the derivation of allowing the derivation of the re-game winning display result (replay) is made. The re-game winning display result is derived on a specific winning line (for example, a horizontal line such as winning lines L1 to L3) among a plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) set in the variable display device. In addition, a specific display result (predetermined combination of outlier symbols) is derived on a winning line (for example, diagonal lines such as winning lines L4 and L5) different from the specific winning line, and before and after the specific timing. Timing (timing before the timing at which the “Mellon” symbol of area number 9 is positioned in the lower row for the left reel 2L, When the stop operation means is operated at a timing later than the timing at which the “Mellon” symbol of area number 9 is located in the lower row for the 2L, the re-game winning display result is derived on any winning line However, the specific display result may not be derived to any winning line (see the modified example (29)). As a result, when the player operates at a specific timing, the player cannot actually operate at the specific timing, and when the player is operated at the timing before and after that, only the re-game winning display result is derived. When operated at a specific timing, the re-game winning display result is derived and the specific display result is stopped and displayed on another pay line. Depending on whether or not the specific display result is stopped and displayed It can be confirmed whether or not the operation can be performed at the timing, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  The end display result may be any of a plurality of types of winning display results, for example, a third specific display different from the first and second specific display results of the re-game winning display results. It may be a result. In this case, the predetermined determination may be a determination that the derivation of all the first to third specific display results is permitted. As a result, it is possible to practice operating at a specific timing in a game in which derivation of the first and second specific display results is permitted, and derivation of all the first to third specific display results is permitted. A special display result different from the third specific display result can be derived by operating at a specific timing in the game being played. In this case, the special display result may be the first specific display result (replay (2)). Thereby, it is a game (practice game) that can confirm whether or not it was able to be operated at a specific timing, or a game for avoiding the end display result being derived by operating at a specific timing Regardless of whether it is a (real game), the common first specific display result is derived, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the operation was performed at a specific timing.

  The end display result may be a predetermined off-line display result different from the winning display result. The predetermined off-line display result as the end display result is, for example, a predetermined winning display result that is permitted to be derived when a predetermined decision is made by the predetermining means, for example, a specific winning line (for example, winning lines L1 to L1). When derived on a horizontal line (L3, etc.), it may be a display error result derived on a winning line different from a specific winning line (for example, diagonal lines such as the winning lines L4, L5) (deformation) Example (30)). Note that the second specific display result described above is a display result different from the end display result.

  (2) Performing an effect that performs a predetermined effect (a successful press effect) when the first specific display result is derived in a game in which it is determined that the re-game winning display result is permitted to be derived Means (sub-control unit 91, Ss503) are further provided.

  According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize whether or not the operation was possible at a specific timing.

(3) When the end display result is derived, control for deriving an advantageous winning display result (15 winning combinations) out of the plurality of types of winning display results with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state for the next game Special game control means (S909) for controlling a special game (single bonus)
The re-game high probability state control means includes:
When the advantageous winning display result is derived, the re-game high probability state is controlled (S1009d),
When the end display result is derived in the re-game high probability state, the re-game high probability state is ended, and the next one game is controlled to the special game (S909).

  According to such a configuration, when the end display result is derived, the re-game high probability state is ended, and the special game is controlled. Further, in the special game, the advantageous winning display result that triggers the control to the re-game high probability state is derived with a higher probability than the normal game state. Furthermore, this special game ends in one game. For this reason, with the derivation of the end display result for ending the re-game high probability state, the player can have a sense of expectation that the control to the re-game high probability state will be started or continued. Can be improved.

  When the re-game high probability state is not controlled, the end display result is derived, whereby the player can have a sense of expectation that the probability of being controlled to the re-game high probability state is increased. In contrast, when the re-game high probability state is controlled, the end display result is derived, so that one game in which a sense of loss and an advantageous winning display result with respect to the end of the re-game high probability state is likely to occur. According to the result, the player can have a sense of expectation that the game will be controlled again to the high probability state. In this way, it is possible to change the emotion to be given to the player by deriving the end display result in accordance with the controlled gaming state.

  The advantageous winning display result may be any one of a plurality of types of winning display results, and may be, for example, a winning display result with game value. In addition, the advantageous winning display result may be set in a plurality of types (for example, 15 winning combinations a, 15 winning combinations b, 15 winning combinations c, etc.) (see Modification (3)).

  When configured in this way, the re-game high probability state control means is a probability of generating the re-game winning display result in the re-game high probability state (predetermining means derives the re-game winning display result. Among a plurality of types of re-game high probability states having different probabilities of determining whether to allow), a re-game high probability state corresponding to the type of the derived advantageous winning display result may be controlled. Further, the probability that the predetermining means determines that the derivation is permitted may be set to be different for each of the plurality of types of advantageous winning display results (refer to the modification (3)). Thereby, the probability that the regame winning display result is generated can be varied depending on the type of the regame high probability state to be controlled. In addition, the type of the re-game high probability state is determined according to the type of the derived advantageous winning display result. As a result, it is possible to add a sharpness by changing the player's feeling of expectation to be controlled to a re-game high probability state that is advantageous to the player according to the type of the derived advantageous winning display result. Can improve the interest of

  In addition, when a plurality of types of advantageous winning display results are set, as a special game, a plurality of types of special games (single games with different probabilities for deriving at least one advantageous winning display result among the plurality of types of advantageous winning display results) You may comprise so that control to bonus (1)-(3)) is possible (refer modification (3)). As a result, according to the type of the special game that is controlled, the re-game high probability state that is advantageous to the player can be controlled, and the player's feeling of expectation can be changed to further enhance the game. Interest can be improved.

(4) The special game control means displays, as the special game, the non-advantageous winning display result (melon) different from the advantageous winning display result among the advantageous winning display result and the plural types of winning display results in the normal gaming state. To a state in which control is performed with higher probability (see FIG. 17D),
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible and
The derivation control means determines when the predetermination means allows the derivation of the advantageous winning display result (when 15 winning combinations are won) or the non-favorable winning display result is derived. When the decision is made to allow the game (when melon is won), the advantageous winning display result is displayed in the variable display area excluding one variable display area (right reel) of the plurality of variable display areas. A display result forming a part of the non-advantageous winning display result (when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped when at least one of 15 winning combinations or melons is won, “Melon-melon” is derived on the winning display result line, and a 15-piece combination or a double tempering state that can be a winning display result on the melon is obtained according to the display result of the right reel).

  According to such a configuration, except for one variable display area, display results constituting a part of the advantageous winning display result and the non-favorable winning display result are derived. For this reason, in particular, in the special game where the probability of deriving the advantageous winning display result and the non-favoring winning display result is increased, while the variable display area is variably displayed, whether the non-favorable winning display result is derived or not. Whether the display result is derived and controlled to the re-game high probability state can be determined, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, if one variable display area is stopped last, which one of the advantageous winning display result and non-favorable winning display result is derived will be advantageously won until one variable display area is stopped (final stop). The player can have a sense of expectation that the display result is derived and controlled to the re-game high probability state.

  The display result constituting the advantageous winning display result is composed of the same display result as the non-advantageous winning display result except for the display result of one variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas. (See the combination of 15-piece combination and melon symbol in FIG. 16).

(5) Game control in which a wiring pattern is formed and has a connector (board-side connector 620a) that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern, and is equipped with a means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game A board (game control board 40);
The game includes at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game to the game control board and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game from the game control board. Electronic components (introduction medal sensor 31);
A relay board having a first connector (connector 621a) and a second connector (connector 622g) for connecting cables, and relaying signal input / output between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board (Operation unit relay board 110);
A connector connected to the connector on the game control board side is provided at one end, and a connector connected to the first connector on the relay board side is provided on the other end, and the game control board and the relay board are electrically connected. A first cable (cable 600a) connected to
The has a connector connected to the relay substrate side of the second connector on the other hand to the end, and a second cable gaming electronic component is connected to the other end (cable 601g),
Connector connection part (connector 620a, connector 610a part) between the first cable and the game control board, connector connection part (connector 611a, connector 621a part) between the first cable and the relay board, and the second cable Each of the connector connection portions (connector 622g, connector 612g portion) with the relay board is in a connection release restriction state that cannot be released unless the release restriction portion related to the connector connection is destroyed (connector restriction member). .

  According to such a configuration, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the game control board, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the relay board, and a connector connection between the second cable and the relay board. Each of the portions is in a connection release restricted state that cannot be released unless the release restriction part related to the connector connection is destroyed, so in any of the three connector connection parts on the game control board and the relay board, Unauthorized devices such as driving tools cannot be connected without leaving traces. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the driving tool as much as possible. Note that the driving tool is used to operate various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board to input and output a signal that simulates the signals input and output to and from the game control board from various electronic components. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing.

(6) The control for deriving the winning display result (grape, melon, 15-piece combination, etc.) with the addition of the gaming value among the winning display results with a higher probability than the normal gaming state is performed over a plurality of games. The fact that the derivation of the special transition prize display results (big bonus (1), (2), regular bonus (1), (2)) accompanying transition to the special gaming state (big bonus, regular bonus) is allowed is described above. A carry-over means (S405, special work) which is decided by the pre-deciding means and carries over the decision to allow the derivation of the special transition prize display result after the next game when the special transition prize display result does not occur. Prepared,
The re-game high probability state control means controls to the re-game high probability state (RT2) when it is determined by the pre-decision means that the derivation of the special transition prize display result is allowed (S720). ,
The derivation control means, when it is determined that the derivation of the special transition prize display result and the re-game prize display result is permitted, the special transition when the re-game prize display result can be derived. Deriving the re-game winning display result in preference to the winning display result,
The slot machine continues for a continuous performance period longer than one game, provided that none of the plurality of types of winning display results has occurred while being controlled to the re-game high probability state. Then, at the end of the continuous effect period, a continuous effect (continuous effect at the time of losing) indicating the effect result whether or not to permit the derivation of the special transition prize display result is determined by the predetermining means is executed. Continuous production execution means (Ss502, timing 9 and timing 16 in FIG. 36) is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, even when it is determined to allow the derivation of the special transition prize display result, the re-game high probability state is controlled, and the re-game prize display result has priority over the special transition prize display result. Therefore, it is possible to continue the state in which the re-game winning display result is generated and the special transition winning display result is hardly generated. For this reason, it can be difficult to understand whether or not the derivation of the special transfer prize display result is permitted from the derived display result, and the player holds that the derivation of the special transfer prize display result is permitted. Expectation can be sustained.

(7) an image display device (liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying an image;
Continuous effect execution means (Ss306 in FIG. 33) for executing a continuous effect that lasts for a continuous effect period longer than one game;
It corresponds to each of a plurality of types of effects executed by displaying an image on the image display device including the continuous effect and a demonstration effect that is executed when a state in which the game is not progressing after the game ends. Image element data storage means (CGROM 142) that stores a plurality of types of image element data (effect data) in advance;
Means for storing data in a readable and writable manner, wherein a temporary storage area (temporary storage memory 155) in which image element data corresponding to an effect being executed among the plurality of types of image element data is temporarily written; Image data storage means including a frame area (frame buffer memory 156) in which image data is drawn based on image element data written in the temporary storage area;
Providing effect control means (sub CPU 91a, display control circuit 92) for controlling the execution of the effect by displaying the image on the image display device as the game progresses,
The production control means includes
Continuous effect data writing means for reading the image element data of the continuous effect from the image element data storage means and writing the read image element data of the continuous effect in the temporary storage area in the game in which the execution of the continuous effect is started. (Transfer control circuit 152);
Demo effect data writing means (transfer control circuit 152) that reads the image element data of the demonstration effect from the image element data storage means after the game is finished, and writes the read image element data of the demonstration effect in the temporary storage area. When,
Image data drawing means (drawing circuit 154) for reading image element data written in the temporary storage area and drawing image data in the frame area based on the read image element data;
Display control means (display circuit 157) for causing the image display device to display an image corresponding to the image data drawn in the frame area for each predetermined frame period;
The demonstration effect at the time of continuous production for which the execution of the demonstration effect is prohibited after the continuous production data writing means writes the image element data of the continuous production in the temporary storage area until the execution of the continuous production ends. Forbidden means (when the effect data for performing the continuous effect is stored in the temporary storage memory 155, until the continuous effect ends, for example, when the game is not performed for a predetermined time without betting. Even so, the display control circuit 92 prohibits writing to the temporary storage memory 155 and does not perform the demonstration effect so that the effect data for performing the demonstration effect is not stored in the temporary storage memory 155. ).

  According to such a configuration, the image element data of the continuous effect is written in the temporary storage area, and the demonstration effect is prohibited until the continuous effect corresponding to this is completed, and as a result, the continuous effect is ended. During this period, the demonstration effect image element data is not written to the temporary storage area, and therefore, the demonstration effect image element data is not erased from the temporary storage area. For this reason, in order to produce a demonstration effect unrelated to the progress of the game, generally, the image element data of a continuous effect with a large amount of data is read from the image element data storage means and written in the temporary storage area of the image data storage means. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of duplicate overhead.

  The demonstration effect data writing means may write the image element data of the demonstration effect in the temporary storage area when a state where the game is not progressing after the game is finished continues for a predetermined time. In this case, the image data of the demonstration effect is drawn in the frame area after the image element data of the demonstration effect is written. On the other hand, the demonstration effect data writing means may write the image element data of the demonstration effect in the temporary storage area immediately after the game ends. In this case, when a state where the game has not progressed after the game is finished continues for a predetermined time, the image data is drawn in the frame area based on the image element data of the demonstration effect written immediately after the game is finished. It becomes.

  Moreover, the said continuous production | presentation may be able to forcibly end the execution in the middle of execution according to a player's instruction | indication. In this case, the demonstration effect prohibiting means during the continuous effect can prohibit the execution of the demonstration effect until the execution of the continuous effect is forcibly terminated by an instruction from the player.

  Further, when the demonstration effect prohibiting means at the time of continuous production is configured to operate by program control, the demonstration effect is not limited to that realized by a program that performs a control that actively prohibits execution of the demonstration effect. This includes a program that has been created so that a routine that implements execution of the program is not called.

(8) When a special transition prize display result is derived from among the prize display results, the probability that the prize display result (melon, grape, 15-card combination) with the addition of the gaming value is higher than that in the normal gaming state And a special gaming state control means (similar to S907) for controlling to a special gaming state (CB in the modified example (2)) in which the control to be derived in is performed over a plurality of games,
The special gaming state control means does not end the re-game high probability state even when it is controlled to the re-game high probability state when the special transition prize display result is derived, Start the control to the special gaming state (see modification (2)),
In the game controlled to the special gaming state, the derivation control unit is configured to display the regame winning display when the prior determination unit determines that the derivation of the regame winning display result is permitted. When a result can be derived, a display result for deriving the re-game winning display result is derived, and when it is impossible to derive the re-game winning display result, a different prize from the re-game winning display result When the display result can be derived, a display result for deriving the winning display result is derived (see modification (2)).

  According to such a configuration, when the special transition prize display result is derived when the re-game high probability state is controlled, the re-game prize display result and the prize display result accompanied with the addition of the game value are displayed in the normal game. Deriving the winning display result when it occurs at a higher probability than the state and it is impossible to derive the regame winning display result and it is possible to derive a winning display result different from the regame winning display result It is controlled to a special gaming state in which a display result as a combination to be derived is derived. For this reason, in the special gaming state when the special transition winning display result is derived when the re-game high probability state is controlled, when the re-game winning display result does not occur, the other winning display result is In terms of the possibility of occurrence, the player has a higher degree of advantage for the player than when controlled only in the re-game high probability state. Therefore, when the re-game is controlled to the high probability state, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled to the special game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The re-game high probability state control means starts control to the re-game high probability state when the advantageous winning display result is derived, and the number of games played in the re-game high probability state is predetermined. You may comprise so that the control to the said re-game high probability state may be complete | finished on the condition that it reached | attained the number of games (regular game number) (refer modification (2)).

  Further, the special gaming state control means does not end the re-game high probability state even when it is controlled to the re-game high probability state when the special transition prize display result is derived. The control to the special gaming state is started, and the number of gaming values given to the player in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number that is determined in advance. You may comprise so that control may be complete | finished (refer modification (2)).

  According to such a configuration, in the special gaming state when the special transition winning display result is derived when the re-game high probability state is controlled, it is impossible to derive the re-game winning display result. A player generates a winning display result different from the game winning display result, so that the number of game values given to the player in the special gaming state reaches a predetermined number with a smaller number of games. Should play a game. For this reason, in the special game state when the special transition prize display result is derived when the re-game high probability state is controlled, the technical intervention can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for performing production control based on the received control information (command),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (commands) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) in a predetermined priority order. Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means,
The effect control information storage means (reception buffer) has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means. In this way, when performing an operation test by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment, The problem that the efficiency of the test cannot be sufficiently increased can be solved. That is, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, the number of control information that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be the storage area of the game control information storage means, that is, a normal game. Thus, it is possible to continuously transmit a large amount of control information up to the limit of the storage area of the production control information storage means without being limited according to the number of storage areas allocated by a number that does not overflow. Therefore, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

(B) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
A predetermined first frame (housing 1a);
A second frame (front door 1b) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the first frame (housing 1a);
An open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) for detecting the open / close state of the second frame (front door 1b);
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) for storing control information (command) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Open / close state detection monitoring means for monitoring the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open switch 28),
When the open / closed state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the open / closed state detection unit (door open detection switch 25) (ON to OFF or OFF to ON), the control information generation unit Open / close state detection information generating means for generating open / close state detection information (door command) indicating the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) as the control information (command),
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Opening for determining whether or not the second frame (front door 1b) is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) indicated by the open / close state detection information (door command). A determination means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame (front door 1b) when the opening determining means determines that the second frame (front door 1b) is open.

  According to such a configuration, it is often necessary to open the second frame in order to perform an illegal act against the slot machine, but when the second frame is opened, the fact is notified. Therefore, fraud against the slot machine can be effectively prevented. Further, the game control means monitors the detection state of the opening / closing state detection means, and when there is a change in the detection state, the opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state after the change is used as control information to the effect control means. By only transmitting, the effect control means determines whether or not the second frame is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means indicated by the open / close state detection information transmitted from the game control means, and the determination The opening of the second frame can be notified based on the result. Therefore, the game control means does not need to determine whether or not the second frame is open from the detection state of the open / close state detection means when notifying the opening of the second frame. Control load can be reduced.

(C) It is determined whether an abnormality (for example, a door opening error, a setting change error, a closing error, a payout error, etc.) has occurred, and a signal for specifying the type of the abnormality that has occurred is transmitted in a parallel signal system. Signal transmission means (main control unit 41);
Conversion output means (external output board 1000, parallel serial) having an output unit for converting the signal from the signal transmission means into a serial signal system capable of specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred and outputting the same to the outside of the slot machine Conversion circuit 1002).

  According to such a configuration, a signal for specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred can be output from one output unit, and a plurality of signals can be output by providing an output unit for each type of abnormality as in the past. It is not necessary to provide more output units than necessary as compared with output from the unit.

  (D) The re-game high probability state control means may control one of a plurality of states having different probabilities that the decision to permit the derivation of the re-game winning display result is made ( Modified example (9)). Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of state is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, the re-game high probability state control means further provides the first re-game on the condition that the control to the special game state to be transferred is completed when the special transfer winning display result is derived. Configure to control to high probability state (RTa),
Further, the pre-determining means controls the first regame winning display result (replay b) and the second of at least a plurality of types of regame winning display results when controlled to the first regame high probability state. Determining whether or not to permit the derivation of the winning display result so that the probability that the derivation of the re-game winning display result (replay c) is permitted is higher than in the normal gaming state,
The re-game high probability state control means includes:
If the first regame winning display result is derived when in the first regame high probability state, the decision to permit the derivation of the regame winning display result is the pre-determining means. Control to a second regame high probability state (RTb) that is advantageous for a player having a higher probability than that of the first regame high probability state;
If the second regame winning display result is derived when in the first regame high probability state, the decision to permit the derivation of the regame winning display result is the pre-determining means. A state (RTc) that is disadvantageous for a player who does not control to the second regame high probability state even if the first regame winning display result is derived even if the probability made by is lower than the first regame high probability state It may be configured to be controlled (see Modification (9)).

  According to such a structure, when it is controlled to the first regame high probability state, it is expected to be controlled to the second regame high probability state, and it is controlled against the disadvantageous state. Anxiety can be felt, and the fun of the game can be improved as compared with the slot machine that is not controlled to the second regame high probability state or the disadvantaged state.

  Furthermore, when configured as described above, a plurality of types of the special transfer prize display results are provided, and when controlling to a special gaming state according to the type of the derived special transfer prize display result, The re-game high probability state control means includes a probability that the derivation of the first re-game winning display result is permitted by the pre-decision means and the second re-game by the pre-decision means. It is controllable to a plurality of types of first regame high probability states in which at least one of the probabilities of allowing the derivation of the winning display result is determined, and according to the type of the special game state that has been completed You may comprise so that it may control to a 1st re-game high probability state (RTa, RTa ', RTa ") (refer modification (9)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the big bonus is ended or the RT symbol is derived, that is, the game is controlled to the high probability state of re-game according to a certain probability. . Which type of special gaming state is controlled, that is, the type that is controlled to the first regame high probability state of the type that has a high probability of being determined to allow the derivation of the first regame winning display result It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game is controlled to the special game state. In addition, the player can have a different feeling of expectation for being controlled to a more advantageous second regame high probability state according to the type of the special game state to be controlled, and the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

(E) When it is determined by the pre-determining means that derivation of any one of the special transition prize display results is allowed and the special transition prize display result is not derived, the special transition prize display result A carry-over means (S405, special work) for carrying over the decision to allow derivation after the next game,
After the re-game high probability state is started, the pre-determining means allows the special transition prize display result to be derived before the digested game number reaches a predetermined specified game number (100 games). If it is determined that the re-game high-probability state is not ended, the number of games digested when the special transition prize display result is derived or when the special transition prize display result is not derived is the specified game. You may comprise so that the said re-game high probability state may be complete | finished when a number is reached (refer modification (10)).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the derivation of the special transition prize display result is allowed before reaching the specified number of games after the re-game high probability state is started, the determination is permitted. If the special transition prize display result is not derived, the re-game high probability state does not end with the determination, and the re-game high probability state can be continuously controlled until the specified number of games is reached. Become. For this reason, even if it is determined that the derivation of the special transition prize display result is permitted in the re-game high probability state, the re-game high probability state is defined unless the permitted special transition prize display result is derived. It is possible to digest until the number of games is reached. A loss of feeling is not given to the player when the game is controlled to a high probability state. In addition, since the decision to allow the derivation of the special transition prize display result by the carryover means is carried over after the next game, the derivation of the special transition prize display result is permitted while being controlled in the re-game high probability state. Can be expected to be determined.

(F) The re-game high probability state control means controls to the re-game high probability state (RT) on the condition that the special gaming state has ended,
The special transition prize display result indicates that the combination of different types of identification information for each of the plurality of variable display areas (for example, the big bonus (1) is “red 7-grape-melon” and the big bonus (2) is “ Grape-white 7-black BAR "etc.)
The production execution means
The player is controlled so that the player is unable to specify the type controlled to the special game state after the special transition prize display result is derived until the special game state ends. Regardless, the bonus content will be played in the same content)
Whether the re-game high probability state is controlled when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (when the game is consumed a predetermined number of times in the bonus, when a predetermined number of medals are paid out in the bonus, or when the bonus ends) You may comprise so that the re-game high-probability state alerting | reporting effect for alerting | reporting may be performed (refer modification (11)).

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify the type of the special transition prize display result from the display result, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice which type of special gaming state is being controlled. For this reason, compared with the conventional slot machine in which the type of the special gaming state is specified from the display result, the player can be focused on the re-game high probability state notification effect. It is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game by performing.

(G) When it is determined that the derivation of any one of the special transition prize display results is permitted by the pre-determining means and the special transition prize display result is not derived, the special transition prize display result Carry-over means (S405, special work) to carry over the decision to allow derivation after the next game;
Game value giving means (S1002 to S1004) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when a prize-winning display result (small role) accompanied by game value addition is derived among the prize display results. When,
Procedure notification control (navigation effect) for notifying the player of information that can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning display result that is allowed to be derived by the predetermining means. A procedure notification means (Ss503) for performing,
The re-game high probability state control means until the special transition prize display result is derived after the pre-determining means determines that the special transition prize display result is allowed to be derived. Including means for controlling the probability state (see the modified example (12)),
The procedure notification means performs the procedure notification control until a predetermined notification period (number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses from a predetermined timing after being controlled to the re-game high probability state.
In the re-game high probability state, an expected value of the amount of game value given per game per game is specified from the information notified by the procedure notification unit when it is within the notification period. The amount of gaming value used for setting the betting amount is larger than the amount of gaming value used for setting the betting number by operating the stop operation means in the procedure described above. It becomes less than the amount (see Modification (12)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the notification period ends due to the bonus winning against the player's will. A game that is given when the pre-determination means determines that the derivation of the special transition winning award display result is permitted until the special transition winning award display result is derived and is in a re-game high probability state and within the notification period. The expected value of the amount of utility value is larger than the amount of game value used for setting the number of bets by operating according to the procedure specified from the notified information. The re-game high probability state is continued as long as at least a special transition prize display result is not derived. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the re-game high probability state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not derive the special transition prize display result. As a result, the player is granted a re-game high probability state and within the notification period by not performing a special transition prize display result and performing a stop operation according to the procedure specified from the notified information. A certain amount of gaming value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest, such as deriving a special transition prize display result and controlling it to a special game state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

(H) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
Production operation means (for example, a touch panel, various switches) provided separately from game operation means (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) operated when the player performs operations related to the progress of the game. )
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
When the control information for test (inspection command) of the operation means for production (touch panel) is received, the operation means inspection means for production for performing the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production (touch panel);
After receiving the test control information (inspection command) of the production operation means (touch panel), control based on reception of new control information (command) until the operation of the production operation means (touch panel) is detected. And during-inspection control prohibition means to be prohibited.

  According to such a configuration, in order to inspect whether or not the performance control means operates normally during development or before shipment, the game control means for operation test is connected to the performance control means and the operation test is performed. In this case, when the production control means receives the test control information for the production operation means, control based on reception of new control information is prohibited until the operation of the production operation means is detected thereafter. Therefore, unless the detection of the operation detection state of the effect operation means is performed, the operation does not shift to the operation based on reception of new control information. For example, the effect control means receives the test control information of the effect operation means. After that, even when the next test control information is newly transmitted by mistake before the operation of the production operation means is detected, the detection of the operation detection status of the production operation means can be normally performed.

  Note that the control information may be information indicating the control state of the game control means, or information indicating designation or instruction of effect control. In addition, the fact that the in-inspection control prohibiting means prohibits control based on reception of new control information may not be reception of new control information itself, or may be received but received new control information. Control based on the above may not be performed.

(I) In the slot machine of (H), the effect operating means detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) and specifies the operated position. Including touch panel
When the detection time of one of the plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) exceeds a predetermined time, the production control means (sub control unit 91) exceeds the predetermined time. Abnormal sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of the sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the detection time of any sensor exceeds a predetermined time, the detection of that sensor is invalidated, so even if some sensors fail, only the failed sensor Since it is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the touch panel from becoming unusable even though the player's operation can be detected by a normal sensor.

  The anomaly sensor invalidation means may invalidate the detection of the sensor whose detection time exceeds a predetermined time, and thereafter not use the invalidated sensor, or periodically invalidate the sensor. The status may be checked and the invalidation may be canceled when the normal status (non-detection status) is confirmed, or the status is invalidated when the normal status is confirmed upon restart. May be canceled.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a (not shown) whose front surface is open, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are “melon”, “grape”, “banana”, “cherry”, “orange”, “star”, “red 7” (FIG. 3). In FIG. 3, a plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as 7), “white 7 (white 7 in FIG. 3)”, and “BAR” are drawn in a predetermined order. . The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal game described later in this embodiment) MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a state (also referred to as an initial gaming state), 3 in RT (replay time) 1-2, and 1 in a regular bonus described later, medals and bets stored as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when paying out the medals used for setting the number (returning medals used for setting credits and bets) Start switch 7 is operated to start the reels 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus to be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. A reset that functions as a setting switch to change the setting value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described later DOO / setting switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the winning line L3 set over the lower symbols, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper right side. There are 5 types of winning lines L4 set across the symbols lined up in a row, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set across the symbols lined down to the right. In the normal gaming state, RT1 to RT2, when a specified number of bets are set, all of the pay lines L1 to L5 are valid, and in the regular bonus A betting amount prescribed number is set only pay line L1 is activated.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 milliseconds. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 x 21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the symbols of 4 frames at maximum are available in 190 milliseconds. Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  In addition, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and detects a voltage drop (for example, whether or not the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). Is a circuit that outputs the signal. Although not specifically shown, the main control unit 41 includes an interrupt input terminal. When a voltage drop signal is input to the interrupt input terminal, an external interrupt occurs, and the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 Performs power interruption interrupt processing according to external interrupts. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  Next, the configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90. As illustrated, the display control circuit 92 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 141 and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 142. The VDP 141 has a high-speed drawing function and a display output function for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51, and executes image processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control unit 91. The CGROM 142 stores image element data and moving image data (effect data) displayed as effects on the liquid crystal display 51.

  The VDP 141 includes a host interface 151, a transfer control circuit 152, a CGROM interface 153, a drawing circuit 154, a temporary storage memory 155, a frame buffer memory 156, a display circuit 157, and a moving image decoder 158. Yes.

  The host interface 151 includes an address input terminal and a data input / output terminal for exchanging various data with the sub-control unit 91. The transfer control circuit 152 performs control to transfer the effect data read from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on a command from the sub control unit 91. The CGROM interface 153 includes an address output terminal and a data input terminal for reading effect data stored in the CGROM 142.

  The drawing circuit 154 executes a drawing process for creating image data of an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the effect data stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The temporary storage memory 155 is composed of, for example, a VRAM (Video RAM) or the like, and includes an effect data area for storing effect data read from the CGROM 142. Further, in the temporary storage memory 155, based on a command from the sub-control unit 91, information indicating the production mode, information indicating that the reel transparent object is set in the transparent area 51b, or the transparent area 51b is made semi-transparent. Such information is also stored.

  The frame buffer memory 156 is configured using, for example, a VRAM that is different from the temporary storage memory 155, and stores image data of an image created by a drawing process by the drawing circuit 154. The frame buffer memory 156 has two frames, and switching between image data writing and reading is performed every frame period. The display circuit 157 uses the image data read from the frame buffer memory 156 (for reading) as gradation data, and outputs the image signal to which the synchronization signal is added to the liquid crystal driver of the liquid crystal display 51. The moving picture decoder 158 is a circuit that decodes the moving picture data when it is read out from the CGROM 142 as effect data.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the gaming state, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus, regular bonus, and single bonus, and small roles with payout of medals, There is a re-player who can start the next game without setting the bet amount. In some cases, the big bonus is indicated as BB, the regular bonus is indicated as RB, and the single bonus is indicated as SB. In some cases, a big bonus, a regular bonus, or a single bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted as described above, and these boards are shown in FIG. As shown, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by the player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are wired through the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in the present embodiment). By connecting, it becomes easy to organize wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always a relay board or game control board. Thus, since the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, it is possible to prevent the connector connecting portion from being searched for during the wiring connecting operation or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets for making the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90. The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving tool is, for example, operating various switches provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of a signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from a game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, a state where a special role is won can be easily set. Therefore, in the case where illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, There is a risk that the fairness of

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. Connection between the side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g. It is regulated by a regulating member.

  Further, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. For example, an example of connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a will be described. An attachment-side member that is attached to a board case that houses the game control board 40, and a member that is attached to the attachment-side member And a connector cover that covers a part of the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a, attaches the attachment-side member to the board case, and attaches the connector cover. The removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the 620a may be restricted. In this case, the attachment side member and the connector cover remove the connector cover from the attachment side member unless the attachment side member or the connector cover is broken when the attachment side member is attached to the board case. It may be configured not to be able to. Accordingly, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a unless the attachment-side member or the connector cover is broken. In addition, although an example was shown as a connector control member, a connector control member is not restricted to such a thing, If the cancellation | release control part is not destroyed, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the insertion medal sensor 31 will be cancelled | released. Any device may be used as long as it is configured so that it cannot be performed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. It can be effectively suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the withdrawal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses and the game Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 according to progress, a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connections between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the release of the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board The same effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between the connectors 40 and restricting the release of the connection between the connectors. In addition, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel is stopped after the reel starts rotating as in the present embodiment, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40 The same effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between them to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. Of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40, When the connection at any of the connectors is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that, and the door opening notification or the door Since the opening signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, and the cable 600a The connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q are also released. The connector is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. Since it is difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, it is preferable to restrict the removal of the front door 1b. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state where the notification that the door has been opened is not made.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 includes a plurality of signal lines that connect the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25. And the operation unit relay board 110 are connected by a single cable 600a, so that the connector connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a, that is, only one connector connection is connected. By restricting the release, it becomes possible to restrict the release of connections between multiple signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare multiple parts for restricting the release of these connector connections, and the number of these parts can be reduced. .

  When a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine while being accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed to each other. If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  For this reason, in this Embodiment, the coating | coated member which covers the sealing piece of a substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 7, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is a challenge time (a gaming state where the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) and a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, there is a gaming state between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a signal during CT indicating that the challenge time is in progress and a signal during CB indicating that the gaming state is during the challenge bonus is connected, and there is a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future. It is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal among these external output signals, The setting change signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal are converted into a security signal, which is a serial signal that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and externally converted. The door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be output from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a serial signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a payout error signal can be output by an AND circuit or the like. If it is output, an error signal may be output to the outside with one terminal. Even in this case, an error occurs in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. It is possible to specify that either one is occurring, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used by the main CPU 41a to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above, for example, in order to manage sales in the hall computer. And a control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that control for canceling the output must be performed. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined, Outputs medals IN signals for the set number of bets together.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collected. Since it is outputted to the outside, it becomes possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the betting number, and the control relating to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment indicates that, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Outputs OUT signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8B, it is determined that a predetermined payout-medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected during medal payout, or the medals continue. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal is actually output. Since the number of medals paid out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively at the end of medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals that are originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotating shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 10A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 10B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 10B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 10B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta at which the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being stopped, and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from deviating from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without performing the next game start operation), and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released when (the same timing as) has elapsed (Td). In other words, after the rotor 32a is stopped, if a predetermined time has elapsed without starting the next game, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so the player is playing a game. In the meantime, it is possible to maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced. On the other hand, in a state in which the player is unlikely to play, the load on the component parts of the stepping motor can be reduced.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and 3 By performing the reel motor stop control together with the phase excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and then the three-phase excitation stop control. As a result, the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position. The inner rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. The general work consists of stop control table, stop symbol, medal payout number, total medal payout number in BB, etc., data that can be initialized at the end of BB, winning flag (single bonus, small at the end of each game) (Combination, replay) and a winning flag are stored. The special work is initialized at the time of winning without being cleared at the end of each game, such as data for sending commands to the effect control board 90, various software random numbers, etc. This is a work in which a winning flag (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2)), and a game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game are stored. . The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and when the transition to the setting change mode is performed, when initialization is performed or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized. Initialization 1 is the state where only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup, and is the initialization performed before the transition to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the storage area of the RAM 41c is All the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the set stop phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. At this time, the stationary phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting change by maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stored in the stop phase work. In this case, these stop phases can be specified. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is used as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set and set in the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting change. Motor 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . Note that the data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Then, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a is the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since the start excitation in match state, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) without performing the game start operation, similarly to the excitation state of the stop phase maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the standby timing (same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) elapses, and by doing so, there is no burden on the parts constituting the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and if it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or Until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated), the game is controlled to a full error state in which the progress of the game is disabled.

  In the present embodiment, medals thrown in from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and medals overflowing when the hopper tank 34a is full are stored in the overflow tank 35. The full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a, and the full tank state is determined. However, the overflow tank 35 is not provided, and whether or not the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a exceeds a certain amount. A full tank sensor may be provided to detect whether the hopper tank 34a is full, and the full tank sensor is used to detect the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. You may make it determine. For example, even when the second full sensor detects a full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of medals is detected during the replay game, the effective insertion of medals is performed. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11, when the insertion of medals is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits. If no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, medals stored in the overflow tank 35 based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected after the game control ends. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage in the tank is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, even if a game in which no medals are inserted from the outside, it is monitored whether or not the amount of medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full. However, the amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full despite the fact that the amount of stored medals does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored as to whether or not the game has entered the state, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player. There is also a problem that increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the end of the game. It is not detected and the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not it is full is not performed wastefully, and the full state can be monitored efficiently. The control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor required for the store clerk to resolve the full tank status. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is made, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game starts without the medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the tank is in a tan state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 does not increase, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank condition, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full tank condition.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of medals is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without inserting medals. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. The full tank error state is controlled before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state in which the medal is paid out and controlling to a full tank error state and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not a full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the tank is full is determined at the timing when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is full at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, or to start the game. You may make it determine whether it is a full state at the time of operation detection, or the time of completion | finish of game control.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. Note that the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 13, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control ends, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 14, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without the medal being inserted. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is completed, that is, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no insertion of medals is necessary in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled, and the full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, and the determination of whether or not it is a full tank error is performed wastefully. The full tank state can be monitored efficiently, the control load required to determine the full tank state can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Or to the Shii I think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is not made wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and the effort required for the store clerk to clear the full tank status. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, Controls to, when the subsequent full Tan'era state is released, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command, standby for the effect control board 90 A plurality of types of commands including a command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command includes the game state of the next game (whether it is a normal game state, RT, big bonus, regular bonus, single bonus, etc.) and the rest of RT This is a command that can specify the number of games and the currently set value, and is transmitted after a setting end command to be described later and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF. Whether the bet number can be set and the specified number of bets has not yet been set, and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 has been accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, and otherwise it is invalid. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in start-up processing and game processing described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt processing described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game ends, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and the operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to the timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is performed by timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. A plurality of commands can be transmitted by transmitting only one of a command stored in the command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Are transmitted at intervals of at least 2.24 ms, the sub-control unit 91 can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  Note that the timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the basic process for the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  In this embodiment, the normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area where a plurality of commands can be stored. The command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer are provided. Alternatively, it is possible to store a newly generated command in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands. (In the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that.) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that if the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or if the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting for transmission (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. More specifically, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is made positive logic in the port input process performed in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 0.56 ms. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, a logical state of about 100 ms (door monitoring process 45 times) is performed for the fixed state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the above-described port input process (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door command is performed with priority over the normal command, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. As a result, even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, it is normal that after the door command is transmitted and before the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input processing performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to a positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) are acquired, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2; that is, the switch monitoring processing performed every 2.24 ms is 1 acquired in the port input processing described above. The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to OR each separately and use the result to make one BET switch 5, M Determining XBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In the present embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. In this case, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer, and when a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the first timer interrupt is performed thereafter. The command received by the process (sub) is read and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a betting number setting operation is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the betting number has been set, the effect being executed is displayed. It is supposed to cancel. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is finished. In such a case, the production is continued unnecessarily even though there is an intention to finish the game by ending the performance being executed. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the final effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and even if a standby command is received in such a state, the demo pattern is controlled. It is not referred to as a pattern, and no demonstration effect is executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special role is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special role has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until an initialization command or a power-on command is received after the startup and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively suppress illegal sales such as providing slot machines 1 that are set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role is won and the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 that controls the special role. It is executed by a production device such as the LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is set illegally, the special control is made when the main control unit 41 is restarted. The winning device is informed that the winning is made and it becomes easier to distinguish, so the slot machine set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool is used when the game player starts business. It is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, In addition, when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 are notified of the special role winning. Also good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In such a case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  In the present embodiment, only the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the electronic component (input medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game is a connector restricting member. The use of unauthorized equipment is also prevented by restricting the release of the connection between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is played before the power interruption. When winning, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not it is structured to restrict the insertion / removal between connectors, so that the structure for regulating the insertion / removal between connectors can be prevented. In this way, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintenance such as at the time of failure is also possible. It is also possible to improve the resistance.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even when a door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command shown is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even if the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door open notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door open notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door open) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door opening notification is stopped. If the opening notification is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. To do.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is made.

  Although it is necessary to open the front door 1b in order to perform some fraudulent action on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, in the present embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, Since the fact is notified, it is possible to effectively prevent such a fraud and to detect it early even if a fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and indicates the detection state after the change when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. Only by transmitting a door command, it is not determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a indicates a door opening detection switch indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of 25, and the door opening notification is performed based on the determination result. Therefore, the main CPU 41a opens the front door 1b. In the notification, it is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening). Detection chattering prevention determination of the switch 25) is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Further, even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game ends. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can always be acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Also, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In the present embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. However, even if the door open detection switch 25 detection state changes while waiting for transmission of a power-on command or an initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the door command and normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If the door command is stored while interrupting the message in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed is overwritten, and the door command is partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a command is stored, and when reels are shaken or medals are paid out. There is a possibility of affecting other controls such as blurring, but the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above, so that the door command is regularly used for basic processing. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing and stored in the transmission buffer within the timer interrupt processing (main) that is executed by interrupting the interrupt, it is necessary to prohibit the interruption when storing the normal command And the above problems can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25, and after the door command is transmitted, the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is further transmitted. It is set to about 100 ms, which is longer than about 72 ms required until the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, and the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are used in the progress of the game. When an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state changes the detection state of these switches, the operation reception of these switches is a valid period for the progress of the game. The sub CPU 91a can specify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation has been effectively performed. Sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, checkout switch 10 In addition to the timing that coincides with the timing at which the game is activated and the game control proceeds, if the operation of these switches is in an invalid state, that is, the timing is not directly related to the game progress control. It becomes possible to execute.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection unit is not installed, but it is originally installed to advance the game, and the operation unit detects the game using the operation unit detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10 are operated, and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch that is in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (such as a chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. Even so, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management is not complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If an operation detection command is stored while the normal command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, and the rotation of the reel Other controls, such as blurring when paying out medals, may affect other controls. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the activated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored with a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and when the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating that there are no two or more continuous beams shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 according to the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (game control board for testing) before shipment. .

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output By designating the component corresponding to the port and its operation mode by the inspection command, it is possible to inspect the operation of the designated component. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  One inspection command can specify only one output port, a component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode. When inspecting by operating different components of the output port at the same time, each output can be specified. Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously transmit 40 inspection commands in this embodiment even if only a test for operating all the electrical components is performed, and the operation of components other than the electrical components is also tested at the same time. When performing, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a plurality of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a speaker, and an inspection command that specifies the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted at the same time. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer in the timer interrupt process (sub). The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. It is prohibited to receive new commands until When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the part and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration part are specified. Operate in a manner.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals transmitted continuously during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in a reception buffer that stores a command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the normal command transmission buffer is provided. Thus, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated in such a number as to prevent overflow in the case of a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) ), And a large number of inspection commands can be transmitted continuously up to the limit of the storage area of the reception buffer (128 commands in this embodiment). Can effectively increase the efficiency.

  In the present embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually specified and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting inspection commands for designating a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each effect part operates normally. .

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, an effect part corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands on the basis of the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer. In this case, even when test commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command, but with one inspection command. It may be possible to specify only one production component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the number of production components in the reception buffer, When performing performance tests for all production parts at once, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production part are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so operation is more efficient. A test can be performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as the touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. In this case, if the next inspection command is erroneously transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation There is a problem that the test is shifted to the test, and the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives an inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel and performs the operation check of the touch panel, the touch operation is detected in the command reception interrupt process. In the meantime, no new command is received. Even if a new command is sent during this period, a new command is detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. Is not received, and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected until the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, for example, buttons and dials may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be applied. In the same way as above, even if the inspection command is erroneously sent without waiting for the completion of the operation check, the operation check is performed by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected. The test can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that the test command for specifying the operation check can be used. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  FIG. 16A is a view for explaining the types of winning combinations in the slot machine 1, the combination of symbols in the variable display device 2, the bonus ending conditions, and the types of RTs to be transferred. As the types of RTs in the present embodiment, RT1 to RT2 having different probabilities of winning the re-gamer are provided. Note that the gaming state controlled by RT1 to RT2 may be simply referred to as RT.

  The big bonus (1) is won when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the initial gaming state or RT. The big bonus (2) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the initial gaming state or RT. When the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), respectively.

  In the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) ends. While the gaming state is the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c, respectively. Further, during the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set to the ON state, when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started, Repeat regular bonus flag is set to ON.

  The big bonus (1) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 270 or more. The big bonus (2) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 270 or more.

  The game state is controlled by RT2 from when the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are won internally until the selected big bonus is won.

  Also, when the big bonus (1) is won, when the big bonus (2) is won, after the big bonus (1) is finished, and after the big bonus (2) is finished, credit adjustment is excluded. Any operation of the player is invalidated and controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. When the big bonus (1) ends and the big bonus (2) ends when the stop function is enabled, any operation of the player is invalid except for the payment of credits. Thus, the control is performed until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated to the stop state where the progress of the game becomes impossible.

  The regular bonus (1) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7-BAR” is aligned on either the winning line in the initial gaming state or RT. The regular bonus (2) is awarded when the combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is aligned on either the winning line in the initial gaming state or RT. When the regular bonus (1) or the regular bonus (2) is won, the gaming state shifts to the regular bonus.

  When the regular bonus (1) or the regular bonus (2) is won, the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the number of medals paid out to the player reaches 70 or more. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The game state is controlled by RT2 after the regular bonus is won internally until the selected regular bonus is won.

  Also, when the regular bonus (1) is won, when the regular bonus (2) is won, after the regular bonus (1) is finished, and after the regular bonus (2) is finished, excluding credit settlement Any operation of the player is invalidated and controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the regular bonus (1) ends when the stop function is enabled and when the regular bonus (2) ends, any operation of the player is invalid except for the payment of credits. Thus, the control is performed until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated to the stop state where the progress of the game becomes impossible.

  Even if one of the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), and regular bonus (2) is won in the internal lottery described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are used for these roles. If the player does not operate at the appropriate timing to be able to win a prize, they will not win any of these roles. This is because the symbols constituting the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus (1), and the regular bonus (2) are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. However, if the winning combination has not been won because the player has not been operated at an appropriate timing, a predetermined chance (in terms of winning) may be derived.

  On the other hand, except for big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), replay (2), grape and cherry, which will be described later, replay (1), melon, When winning in the internal lottery to be described later, since the symbols constituting these roles are arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, in principle, the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Regardless, it is possible to win a prize.

  The single bonus is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-star” is arranged in either the initial game state or the winning line in RT. Here, referring to FIG. 3, symbols constituting the single bonus are arranged within 7 frames in the reel 2L and within 5 frames in each of the reels 2C and 2R. Therefore, when the single bonus is won and the reel 2L is stopped before the middle reel 2C, a winning can be made regardless of the timing of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. ing. However, even when the single bonus is won, as described later, when the reel 2L is not stopped before the middle reel 2C and the stop switch 8L is operated at a predetermined timing, the reel 2L The symbol “banana” cannot be drawn on the winning line where the symbols constituting the already stopped single bonus winnings are stopped, and it may be impossible to win. In this way, by intervening the player's game amount on whether or not the single bonus is won, even if the single bonus is won, whether or not to win according to the player's operation It is comprised so that may arise.

  When the single bonus is won, the game state is shifted to the single bonus for the next one game. If a single bonus is won during RT1, the RT1 is terminated and a single bonus is entered. In the single bonus, in particular, the probability of winning a melon and 15 cards in the internal lottery is higher than in the initial gaming state. While the gaming state is the single bonus, the single bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  As will be described later, in the case of a single bonus, a small role melon may be simultaneously read out as a lottery target role in an internal lottery. Therefore, when a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously read as a lottery target combination and won, the single bonus read out and the melon will be won in duplicate.

  In the following description, “+” may be indicated between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery. For example, the notation “single bonus + melon” indicates that the single bonus and the melon are simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  Grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is arranged on any winning line, and 5 medals are paid out in the initial gaming state and RT.

  A melon is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” is arranged on any winning line, and 8 medals are paid out in the initial gaming state and RT.

  The 15 winning combination is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-star” is arranged on any winning line, and 15 medals are paid out in the initial game state and RT. After winning the 15-card combination in the initial gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to RT1 until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The termination condition of RT1 is established by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus, winning a single bonus, or deriving an RT termination symbol to be described later.

  If the 15-card combination or melon is won, the number of drawing frames for which “melon” is specified as the display result for all the area numbers is defined as the stop control table for the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C. A stop control table is created. Therefore, if the left and middle reels are stopped when the 15-card combination or melon is selected, “Mellow-melon” is derived on the winning line, and the 15-sheet combination or melon is selected according to the display result of the right reel. It becomes a double tempering state that can win a prize.

  Note that 15 medals are paid out by winning the grapes, melons, and 15-piece combination during the big bonus, regular bonus, and single bonus.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on any winning line for the left reel 2L in any gaming state, and two medals per winning line in the initial gaming state and RT. To be paid out. When “cherry” is stopped at the upper or lower stage of the left reel 2L, derivation is made on two pay lines, so that a total of four medals are paid out. Even if a cherry is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, the winning combinations will not be won. This is because the symbols of the reel 2L constituting the cherry are not arranged within 5 frames on the reel 2L.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “banana-banana-banana” is aligned on either the winning line in the initial gaming state or RT. Replay (2) is awarded when the combination of “orange-banana-banana” is aligned on either the winning line in the initial gaming state or RT.

  As described above, in principle, the replay (1) can be awarded regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Replay (2) may occur when winning is not possible depending on the timing when the stop switch 8L is operated. Replay (1) and replay (2) are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery. Therefore, the replay (1) and the replay (2) are won by overlapping each other. For this reason, even if it is impossible to win the replay (2), the replay (1) can be won, and the replay is not substantially missed.

  When winning a replay, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of wagers again, so three medals corresponding to the number of bets 3 that are not required to be set in the next game are paid out. This is essentially the same as.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating a combination of symbols of the RT end symbol that ends RT1 by being derived. As will be described later, the RT end symbol is a symbol that is derived only when the single bonus is won independently of the melon and the single bonus is missed. The RT end symbol is composed of a combination of “orange-melon-melon”.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above-described winning combination (derivation of a winning display result) is allowed is determined before the display result of the variable display device 2 is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). , To decide. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the acquired random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the situation.

  In the ROM 41b described above, a winning combination table used for determining a combination determined to be a winning in the internal lottery is stored in advance. The registered content of the winning combination table indicates a predetermined combination. In each game, a combination that is a lottery target is referred to. The winning combination table in the present embodiment is stored in the ROM 41b, and a predetermined combination is read out as a lottery target.

  Specifically, the winning combination table shows a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus (1), a regular bonus (2), a single bonus + melon when the gaming state is the initial gaming state or RT1. , Single bonus, replay (1) + replay (2), grape, melon, cherry, and 15-piece combination are sequentially read as lottery targets.

  In addition, when the gaming state is RT2 or a single bonus, the winning combination table shows big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), replay (1) + replay ( 2) Grapes, melons, cherries, and 15 sheets are sequentially read out as lottery targets.

  Although not shown in the drawing, in the winning combination table, when the game state is a regular bonus (including a regular bonus provided during a big bonus), grape, melon, and 15-sheet combination are sequentially selected as a combination subject. It is configured to be read out.

  Note that the winning combination table may be configured such that the same winning combination is read as the lottery target combination regardless of the gaming state. In this case, when the gaming state is RT2 or a single bonus, even if a single bonus + melon and a single bonus are read as a lottery target role, it is a case where a lottery is not performed or a lottery is performed and a prize is won. However, the winning flag may not be set. In addition, when the game state is a regular bonus, even if a winning combination other than grapes, melons, and a 15-sheet combination is read out as a lottery target portion, it is a case where a lottery is not performed or a lottery is performed to win Even in such a case, the winning flag may not be set.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the target part of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number for the internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the target part is won. Is done. If the winning combination is determined, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined that the winning combination is obtained when a plurality of winning combinations are read out as the lottery winning combination, a winning flag corresponding to each of the read out winning combinations is set in the RAM 41c. For example, when a single bonus + melon is read out as a lottery target and determined to be a winning combination, a single bonus winning flag and a melon winning flag are set in the RAM 41c. The number of determination values is read in accordance with the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role table stored in advance in the ROM 41b. The number of determination values for each combination may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. This number of determination values is stored in the RAM 41c in the development model and in a storage area provided in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the mass production model.

  FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is the initial gaming state. For example, when the set value is 1, “100” is the regular bonus (1) when the target character of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and “100” is the big bonus (2). Replay (1) When “50” is regular bonus (2), “50” is a single bonus + melon, “327” is a single bonus and “327” is a single bonus + When replay (2) is “9000”, “2500” is grape, “9000” is melon, “700” is cherry and “700” is 15 characters “1” is acquired as the number of determination values. FIG. 17A also shows the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (a), the larger the set value, the larger the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), and regular bonus (2) acquired in the internal lottery. The number of judgment values to be made is large. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is RT1. When the gaming state is RT1, the same winning combination as in the initial gaming state is read out by internal lottery. The number of determination values when a winning combination other than Replay (1) + Replay (2) is read is the same as the number of determination values acquired in the initial gaming state (the network in FIG. 17B). Refer to the hanging part). When the target combination of the internal lottery is replay (1) + replay (2), “38000” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 17C is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is RT2. When the gaming state is RT2, as described above, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), replay (1) + replay (2), grape, melon , Cherry and 15-piece combination are sequentially read out as lottery targets. The number of determination values when a winning combination other than replay (1) + replay (2) is read is the same as the number of determination values acquired in the initial gaming state (the network in FIG. 17C). Refer to the hanging part). When the target combination of the internal lottery is replay (1) + replay (2), “21000” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 17D is a diagram showing the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a single bonus. When the gaming state is a single bonus, as described above, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), replay (1) + replay (2), grape, Melon, cherry, and 15-piece combination are sequentially read out as a lottery target. The number of determination values when a winning combination other than melon and 15-piece combination is read is the same as the number of determination values acquired in the initial game state (see the shaded portion in FIG. 17D). . “20208” to “20268” are acquired as the number of determination values when the target combination of the internal lottery is melon according to the set value, and “32768” is acquired when there are 15 combinations.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c), when the probability of winning the replay (1) + replay (2) is the initial gaming state and the single bonus, 9000 / 65536≈13.73% Thus, the number of determination values is set to be 38000 / 65536≈57.98% when RT1 and 21000 / 65536≈32.04% when RT2. Thus, the probability of winning the replay (1) + replay (2) is set to be higher in RT1 and RT2 than in the initial gaming state and single bonus. For this reason, RT1 and RT2 can be said to be advantageous game states for the player in that the probability of winning the replay (1) + replay (2) is higher than in the initial game state and the single bonus.

  Also, RT1 is extremely easy to win replay (1) + replay (2) as compared to other gaming states. As described above, the winning combination of 15 sheets is the trigger for shifting the gaming state to RT1 which is easy to win such replay (1) + replay (2). The probability that a 15-card combination will be won is extremely high when it is controlled to a single bonus as shown in FIG. 17 (d), compared with the gaming state shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c). Become. The probability of winning a 15-piece combination in a single bonus is set to 32768/65536 = 50%. That is, it can be said that the single bonus is a game state that is easily transferred to RT1 because the internal winning is made with a probability of 15% for 15 winning combinations. For this reason, the single bonus can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player in that the probability of being controlled to RT1 is high compared to other game states.

  On the other hand, as described above, the single bonus winning is the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the single bonus. The single bonus is also a winning combination for ending RT1. For this reason, when it is not RT1, the player can be expected to win a single bonus, generate 15 winning combinations, and shift to RT1. On the other hand, when it is RT1, the player can be expected to not win the single bonus so that RT1 does not end.

  The single bonus is a winning combination that can be made impossible to win according to the player's game skill even when winning. Specifically, as will be described later, when the single bonus is won simultaneously with melon, depending on the player's game skill, the single bonus is avoided and RT1 is continued while winning the melon. You can earn medals.

  On the other hand, even if the single bonus can be avoided, RT1 is terminated by derivation when the single bonus is not won simultaneously with melon as described later (when the single bonus is won alone). Reel stop control is performed so that the RT end symbol can be derived.

  As described above, by intervening the game amount on whether or not to win the single bonus, it becomes possible to avoid the single bonus winning by the player's game amount and to continue RT1, and to increase the interest of the game. Can be improved. In addition, when a single bonus is avoided depending on the player's gaming skill, a medal that should have been won when a single bonus was won (including during a single bonus) cannot be obtained, but a loss occurs. Melon wins and medals are paid out, so the loss can be replenished.

  On the other hand, the RT end symbol is set as the RT1 end condition, and when the single bonus is won by itself and the single bonus winning is avoided, the RT end symbol is derived. Thus, it is impossible to continue RT1 until it continues to avoid this, and it is possible to limit the period (number of games) that is continuously controlled by RT1 and to prevent the shooting performance from becoming too high.

  In the present embodiment, the case has been described in which when the single bonus is won, the probability that the melon is won simultaneously and the probability that the melon is not won simultaneously are the same. However, when the single bonus is won, the probability that the melon is won simultaneously and the probability that the melon is not won simultaneously are not limited to the same, and may be set to be different probabilities.

  For example, if the probability that a melon won not win simultaneously is set higher than the probability that a melon won simultaneously when a single bonus is won, even if the game progresses so as not to win a single bonus, RT1 The probability that the RT end symbol is derived becomes higher than the probability of continuing. In this case, the continuation rate of RT1 can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the shooting performance from being excessively increased.

  Also, if the probability that melon won not win at the same time is set lower than the probability that melon won at the same time when a single bonus is won, RT will end by proceeding with the game so that no single bonus is won. The probability that RT1 is continued is higher than the probability that a symbol is derived. In this case, the continuation rate of RT1 can be improved, and the player's sense of expectation for the continuation of RT1 can be improved.

  In addition, the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a regular bonus, for example, when the set value is 1 to 4, the target lot of the internal lottery is 15 pieces Sometimes “6200” is acquired as the determination value, “54100” is acquired as a melon, and “1000” is acquired as a grape. In this way, the number of determination values is set so that the probability of winning a small role is higher in the regular bonus than in the initial gaming state. For this reason, the regular bonus can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than in the initial gaming state.

  As described above, when the winning combination table is configured so that the same winning combination is read out as the lottery target regardless of the gaming state, the internal lottery target in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a regular bonus “6200” is acquired as a determination value when the combination is 15 pieces, “54100” is acquired as a determination value when it is a melon, and “1000” is acquired as a determination value when it is a grape. You may comprise so that the number of determination values may not be acquired at the time of a winning combination other than.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each spinning reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a table index stored in the ROM 41b. As shown in the figure, the table index stores the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored for each internal winning situation.

  Even if the internal winning situation is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored. In such a case, The stop control table is created with reference to the same table creation data. Here, the table creation data is made up of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referred according to the reel stop status is whether all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, only the left reel 2L is stopped, only the middle reel 2C is stopped, or the right reel Depending on whether only 2R is stopped, left and middle reels 2L and 2C are stopped, left and right reels 2L and 2R are stopped, and middle and right reels 2C and 2R are stopped. In addition, in a situation where any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, it may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped reel.

  In the table creation data, the address of the drawing frame number data to be referred to is registered for each reel being rotated for each situation. The address of the number of frames to be drawn that should be referred to according to each situation can be specified based on the top address of the table creation data. From this specified address, the number of frames to be drawn that are necessary for each situation can be obtained. It can be specified. Even if the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the number of frames to be drawn when the same number of frames to be drawn is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  In addition, the number of drawn frames data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. As the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, stepping motors that make one round with a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and an area number from 0 to 20 from the reel reference position is assigned to each reel symbol. Therefore, from symbol 0 to symbol 20 , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  The stop control table is created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above. In the stop control table, corresponding to the area numbers 0 to 20, the timing corresponding to each area number is the timing (reel) at which the area corresponding to each area number is positioned at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area). The number of frames to be drawn when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing at which the number of steps from the reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning situation in the game is acquired. Then, the table creation data is specified based on the acquired head address, and the address of the drawing frame number data of each reel corresponding to the state where all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating is acquired from the specified table creation data. Then, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored at the acquired address is developed to create a stop control table for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  Also, when any one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped or when any two are stopped, a table is created according to the top address acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the internal winning situation in the game. The table creation data is identified based on the start address of the data, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn in the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. Then, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol Will stop in the area).

  In addition, the table index stores only one address as the top address of the table creation data storage area corresponding to one internal winning situation in one gaming state. Is stored with only one address as the address of the storage area of the number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning status, and the number of frames to be drawn corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The created stop control table is also unique for one internal winning situation and reel stop situation (and stop position of a stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the internal winning status and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Will be performed.

  In addition, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In addition, in the table index, the number of drawn-in frames is drawn so that the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and no winning combination is arranged, corresponding to the case where any combination is won. Stores the address of the predetermined table creation data. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel is controlled to be stopped.

  In addition, the table index stores the address of table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn in is determined so as not to have any combination corresponding to the case of loss. For this reason, in the case of a loss, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn that do not have any combination is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop them. The symbol of the winning combination is controlled so as to be removed and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In the table index, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, or when a special role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Melon, Regular Bonus ( 2) + Grapes, etc.), the number of frames to be drawn is set so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the winning special role is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames. For the non-stop operation position, the address of the table creation data in which the number of drawn frames is determined so that the selected winning combination is drawn to the maximum within the range of four frames is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to stop them together. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the symbol of the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped within the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  In addition, the table index indicates that the special combination has been carried over from the previous game and the re-playing combination is won (Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1) + Replay (2)) The address of the table creation data in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined so as to draw the game combination to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. If the re-gamer is elected in a state where the special game has been carried over from before the previous game, the re-gamer will always win and win regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. It will be. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  When replay (1) + replay (2) is won, as will be described later, as a stop control table for all reels, the replay (1) or win that is won for all area numbers A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames specifying the symbols constituting the replay (2) is specified as a display result is created, and stop control of all reels is performed.

  In addition, the table index indicates that the single bonus is won without winning simultaneously with melon, and when the single bonus and melon are won at the same time. Pull the symbol up to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and stop it in the upper stage, pull the symbol of “banana” in the range of 4 frames to the maximum in the upper reel and stop at the upper stage, and set the “star” in the upper row for the right reel 2R The address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be stopped is stored, and reel stop control is performed.

  For the left reel 2L, when the stop button 8L is operated at a timing when the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 is positioned at the lower stage, 4 can be drawn from the “grape” of the area number 11 positioned at the upper stage at that timing. Since “banana” is not arranged up to the top of the frame, it is impossible to stop “banana” on the upper stage of the left reel 2L. In this case, stop control of the next reel is performed.

  First, if at least the middle reel 2C has not been stopped yet, the symbol “banana” in the region number 10 is stopped at the lower stage. Then, by stopping the “banana” symbol on the middle reel 2C in the middle stage, the “star” on the right reel 2R is stopped on the upper stage. As a result, “banana-banana-star” is derived on the winning line L4, a single bonus is won, and when it is controlled by RT1, the RT1 is terminated.

  Next, if at least the middle reel 2C has already stopped, the RT end symbol is derived when the single bonus is won by itself without winning simultaneously with the melon, and the single bonus is won simultaneously with melon. The reel stop control for winning a melon is performed without deriving the RT end symbol.

  Specifically, when the single bonus is won independently of the melon, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbol “orange” of the area number 13 of the left reel 2L is stopped at the lower stage. Done. Since the “melon” symbol is stopped at the lower stage of the middle reel 2C and the “melon” symbol is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel 2R, “orange” is displayed on the winning line L2. When the RT end symbol of “-melon-melon” is derived and controlled by RT1, control for terminating RT1 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the single bonus and the melon are won at the same time, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbol “melon” of the area number 12 of the left reel 2L is stopped at the lower stage. Since the symbol “melon” is stopped at the lower stage of the middle reel 2C and the symbol “melon” is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel 2R, the symbol “melon” is stopped on the winning line L2. When “-melon-melon” is derived and a melon is won and controlled by RT1, the control continues to RT1.

  As described above, when the single bonus is won at the same time as the melon, at least the middle reel 2C is stopped, and the timing at which the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 is located in the lower stage for the left reel 2L. When the stop button 8L is operated, the reel stop control is performed so that the melon is won by pulling the “melon” of the area number 12 to the lower stage and stopping it. Thereby, it becomes possible to continue the RT1 by avoiding the single bonus winning according to the game amount of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when a single bonus is avoided depending on the player's gaming skill, a medal that should have been won when a single bonus was won (including during a single bonus) cannot be obtained, but a loss occurs. Melon wins and medals are paid out, so the loss can be replenished.

  On the other hand, in the case where the single bonus is won independently without winning at the same time as the melon, and at least the middle reel 2C is stopped, the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 on the left reel 2L is in the lower row. When the stop button 8L is operated at the position of the position, the reel stop control is performed so that the RT end symbol is derived by pulling the “orange” of the area number 13 to the lower stage and stopping. This makes it impossible to continue RT1 until it continues to avoid single bonus winnings, and can limit the period (number of games) that is controlled continuously by RT1 and prevent the shooting performance from becoming too high. can do.

  In the present embodiment, as an operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning, at least the middle reel 2C is stopped, the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 is positioned in the lower stage for the left reel 2L. As an example, the operation of the stop button 8L at the timing to be performed has been described. Considering the fact that each reel is driven to make 80 revolutions per minute as described above, it can be said that the game amount for performing this operation is extremely difficult for the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, whether the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is successful or unsuccessful in the game that is in RT1 and that is won by replay (1) + replay (2). Therefore, such an operation practice can be performed.

  Specifically, in a game that is in RT1 and is selected for replay (1) + replay (2), at least the middle reel 2C is stopped and the “melon” Only when the stop button 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol "" is located at the lower stage, the "orange" of the area number 13 is pulled to the upper stage in the left reel 2L and stopped, and the replay of "orange-banana-banana" ( The reel stop control is performed so that 2) wins. When the stop button 8L is not operated at the timing when the symbol of “melon” of area number 9 is positioned in the lower stage for the left reel 2L, the reel stop control is performed so that the replay (1) wins. . Therefore, the player can recognize whether the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is successful or unsuccessful depending on whether or not the replay (2) has been won without reducing the operating rate of the slot machine. You can practice.

  In addition, the practice of the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning can be executed in the game that is won in the replay (1) + (2), which has a high probability during RT1. For this reason, it is possible to provide more players with a game in which it is possible to confirm whether the operation for enabling a single bonus prize to be avoided during RT1 is successful or unsuccessful without reducing the operating rate of the slot machine. it can.

  If the game is not won by Replay (1) + Replay (2) even during RT1, whether or not the operation was successful even if an operation to make it possible to avoid a single bonus prize was performed The player cannot confirm whether it has failed, and the labor for performing the above operations is wasted. In order to prevent the wasteful consumption of labor in this way, when RT1 is in progress, a predetermined game is performed so that the player can recognize that the game has been won by replay (1) + replay (2). You may comprise so that presentation (a predetermined lamp lighting, a predetermined character, item display, predetermined sound generation, etc.) may be performed.

  Note that the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is not limited to the illustrated one, and may be any operation. The operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is, for example, a stop button when one of a plurality of consecutive region number symbols (for example, region numbers 0 to 4) is at a predetermined position (for example, the lower row). May be operated. Further, the operation for making it possible to avoid a single bonus winning may be, for example, operating each stop button at a predetermined timing for each of a plurality of reels (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.).

  On the game control board 40 side, the internal lottery is performed as described above, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped according to the result and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a prize is generated. It will be a thing. As a result of winning a prize, a medal is paid out or a game state is transferred as a payout. Thus, depending on the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, an original effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side. It is. In order to perform such an effect, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, but is sent from the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. As described later, various effects are performed based on the above-described commands related to the progress of the game.

  In the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone, so the ROM 91b does not have the reel 2L. Tables indicating all symbols arranged in 2C, 2R are stored in advance, and symbols stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are registered in the stopped symbol table with reference to this table.

  In order to perform the performance, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. Area for storing winning status, combination of display results derived to reels 2L, 2C, 2R, information indicating presence / absence of winning, game state applied in game running on game control board 40 ( The winning situation and the gaming state are also provided in the RAM 91c twice.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92, a game effect corresponding to the game state, during RT1 There is a navigation effect in which information advantageous to a player involved in winning a single bonus is notified when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied.

  The game effect is a big bonus medium effect that is executed when the gaming state is a big bonus (a big bonus winning effect that is executed when the big bonus is won, a big bonus end effect that is executed when the big bonus ends) ), Regular bonus medium effect that is executed when the game state is in the regular bonus (regular bonus winning effect that is executed when the regular bonus is won, regular bonus end effect that is executed when the regular bonus is ended) High probability continuous effects that are executed over a plurality of games when the gaming state is RT1, and a successful push that is executed when the gaming state is RT1 and winning the replay (2) When the production and gaming state is RT (including RT1 and RT2) Shift out the continuous production which is performed over three game occurrence, single bonus effect the gaming state is performed when in the single bonus includes normal effect carried out in the initial game state. At the end of the continuous production at the time of losing, a jackpot effect or a loss effect that is executed based on whether a regular bonus or a big bonus is won is performed. Image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in the CGROM 142.

  Since the continuous performance is continuously executed across a plurality of game periods, the next game in which the start switch 7 is operated next is started after all reels are stopped during the actual execution period. It is executed continuously including the period up to.

  Bonus winning effects (including big bonus winning effects and regular bonus winning effects) are executed when the corresponding bonus is won, and the bonus described above when the bet amount is set for the next game in which these winnings occur. Medium production begins.

  When continuous effects such as the above-mentioned bonus medium effect, high-probability continuous effect, and off-time continuous effect are being performed, a series of game sounds are continuously output over a plurality of games. In this way, game sounds that are continuously output over a plurality of games are referred to as continuous game sound effects. Game sound data for generating game sounds (including continuous game effect sounds) for performing a game effect is stored in a ROM mounted on the audio output circuit 94. The generation of the game sound is generated when the sub-control unit 91 outputs a game sound data read command, a generation start command, an end command, or the like corresponding to the current game state to the voice output circuit 94. Controlled and executed by.

  Also, the navigation effect is notified by the winning combination by displaying a character corresponding to the winning combination when either of the single bonus + melon and the single bonus is won after being controlled by RT1. Directing. As a navigation effect, for example, when a single bonus + melon is won, an effect of causing a red character to appear is performed. Further, when only the single bonus is won, an effect of causing a white character to appear is performed. It is possible to notify the player whether the single bonus is won from the appearing characters and whether the melon is won at the same time. For this reason, for example, when an effect in which a red character appears is performed, since melon is won at the same time, it is possible to avoid winning a single bonus by winning melon and maintain RT1. The player can be made aware that this is possible.

  The successful pressing effect is a predetermined effect for notifying that the operation is an operation for enabling the above-described single bonus winning when the replay (2) is won during RT1. (Predetermined lamp lighting, predetermined character item display, predetermined sound generation, etc.) are performed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the operation for enabling the single bonus winning can be avoided.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs a history display effect in which a predetermined game history stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the player's operation on the touch panel. In the history display effect, not only the game history is simply displayed as information, but the sub CPU 91a further performs an operation for advancing the game for a predetermined period or longer (however, the reel 2L). 2C and 2R, except for the case where the game is in progress from the start to the stop of the rotation), the liquid crystal display 51 performs a predetermined demonstration effect. The history display effect and the demonstration effect are performed during a period in which the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not in progress.

  These effects are controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 51 under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM 142 as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each effect mode, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the effect mode at that time. It will be a thing. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM 142 in advance.

  However, since the liquid crystal display 51 is also provided over the transmission area 51b on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R depend on the state of the image displayed on the transmission area 51b. In some cases, the visibility of the symbols drawn on the screen is impaired, and the progress of the game is affected. Accordingly, at least the winning determination area that is the target of the winning determination is not displayed in the transparent area 51b until the rotation of all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R after the start switch 7 is operated (that is, the transparent area 51b (winning area 51b) The RGB value of each pixel in the (determination area) is set to (31, 31, 31) to be a completely transparent state).

  When all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating, the liquid crystal display 51 starts to produce effects, but each pixel in the transmission area 51b (winning determination area) has higher transparency than the image that is originally displayed. Even if the image is displayed in a region including the transmissive region 51b (winning determination region), the transmissive region 51b (winning determination region) is controlled (ie, the RGB value is close to (31, 31, 31)). The symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back side are visible. However, when a small role wins according to the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and medals are paid out accordingly, in order to ensure that the winning combination can be confirmed during the payout of medals. The transparent area 51b (winning determination area) remains hidden, and the image of the transparent area 51b (winning determination area) is controlled to be in a semi-transparent state after the medal payout is completed.

  The image data of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is developed in the frame buffer memory 156 (for writing) in each frame period. When the image data is written in the frame buffer memory 156, the image of the object on the front side is displayed. The Z buffer method is used so that data remains. In the period from the operation of the start switch 7 to the stop of all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (however, when the medals are paid out, the payout is completed), the position corresponding to the transparent area 51b (winning determination area) A transparent area 51b object is set on the front surface.

  The transparent area 51b object is a completely transparent object having RGB values of (31, 31, 31), and the processing of writing image data to the frame buffer memory 156 is performed with the highest priority in each frame period. It has become. By writing the image data of the transparent area 51b object, the Z value written in the Z buffer of the portion corresponding to the transparent area 51b (winning determination area) becomes the minimum value indicating the foreground value. The moving image or still image data is not written in the portion corresponding to the transparent area 51b (winning determination area).

  Further, as a method for making the transmissive region 51b (winning determination region) a semi-transmissive state, there are two methods of white addition processing and semi-transparent processing, and any one of them can be applied. Which one of white addition processing and semi-transparency processing is to be executed depending on the type of effect data and the state of the image that is displayed integrally with the area other than the transmission area 51b (winning determination area). It is good. Here, it is assumed that the RGB value in the original image data is (Rs, Gs, Bs), and the RGB value in the image data after undergoing the process of making the translucent state is represented by (Rd, Gd, Bd).

  When performing the white addition process, the RGB values in the image data of the transmissive area 51b (winning determination area) are calculated as follows.

Rd = Rs + 16 (if Rd> 31 then Rd = 31)
Gd = Gs + 16 (if Gd> 31 then Gd = 31)
Bd = Bs + 16 (if Bd> 31 then Bd = 31)
When translucent processing is performed, the RGB values in the image data of the transmissive area 51b (winning determination area) are calculated as follows (where α is an α value representing translucency).

Rd = 16 * α + Rs * (1−α)
Gd = 16 * α + Gs * (1−α)
Bd = 16 * α + Bs * (1−α)
Among the effects executed by the control of the sub control unit 91, there is a prize effect as an effect by changing the lighting state of the reel LED 55 based on a command output to the LED drive circuit 93.

  In principle, the winning effect is an effect of notifying the winning combination by blinking the reel LED 55 corresponding to the constituent symbols of the winning combination aligned on the effective line when any winning combination is aligned on the effective line.

  Hereinafter, processing in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed. In order to be able to advance the game, the setting value of the normal range is stored in the setting value work with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal. There is no condition.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. This activation process is a process performed when a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49 of the game control board 40 and the main control unit 41 is activated. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the main control unit 41 is activated and the main control unit 41 is activated. This process is performed when restarting due to a problem.

  In the startup process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (step S101), and access to the RAM 41c is permitted (step S102). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON (step S103). If the setting key switch 37 is not ON, the RAM parity is calculated based on all the data stored in the RAM 41c except for the parity storage area (step S104).

  Next, the RAM parity calculated here is compared with the RAM parity stored in the parity storage area, that is, the RAM parity calculated and stored at the previous power-off (step S105), and both RAM parities match. Whether or not the data stored in the RAM is normal (step S106). In the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the RAM 41c is normal based on the RAM parity is performed only in the startup process.

  If the RAM parities do not match in step S106, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and the process proceeds to the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. If the RAM parities match, the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal, and the register stored in the stack area 41c-6 is restored (step S107). Next, it is determined whether or not a big bonus or a regular bonus is won in the state before power interruption (step S107a). A power-on command indicating the winning of the bonus to be generated is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S107b), and the process proceeds to step S108. On the other hand, if the big bonus and the regular bonus are not won in the state before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the big bonus and the regular bonus are not won is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step). S107c), the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the prohibition of interruption is canceled, and the process returns to the process before power-off.

  If the setting key switch 37 is ON in step S103, the prohibition of interruption is canceled (step S110), and the process proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG. 20 (step S111). Then, after the setting change process is completed, the game can be progressed and the process proceeds to the game control process.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process executed by the main CPU 41a in step S111. In the setting change process, first, a setting change flag indicating that the setting change mode is being set is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (step S201), and the setting value stored in the setting value work (the process proceeds to the setting change process). Since the value of the set value work has been rewritten to 1 before, 1 is read here (step S202).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (steps S203 and S204). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in step S203, 1 is added to the setting value read in step S202 (step S205), and whether or not the setting value after addition is 5, that is, the normal range is set. It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded (step S206). If the set value after addition is not 5, the process returns to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in steps S203 and S204. If the set value after addition is 5, the set value is corrected to 1 (step S207), and the process returns to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in steps S203 and S204.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in step S204, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work and the set value is confirmed (step S208). Thereafter, the process waits until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the setting key switch 37 has been turned off, the setting change flag set in step S201 is deleted (step S210). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before the power interruption is one of a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a single bonus (step S211a). If none of the big bonus, regular bonus, and single bonus is found, the process proceeds to step S211c. On the other hand, if it is one of a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a single bonus, the value of the gaming state flag stored in the special work is updated to a value indicating the initial gaming state (step S211b). Proceed to processing. In step S211c, data stored in the RAM 41c (excluding data in the stack area being used in the stack area, setting values stored in the setting value work, and values indicating the gaming state stored in the special work) are stored. Initialization (step S211c) returns to the flowchart of FIG. 19 and proceeds to the game control process. When the setting change process is performed by the processing of steps S211a to S211c, if the gaming state before the setting is one of a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a single bonus, the gaming state is changed to the initial gaming state. On the other hand, when the game state before the setting is made is the initial game state or RT, the game state is restored.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the RAM abnormality error process executed by the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. In the RAM abnormality error process, the payout display unit 13 is controlled to display the RAM abnormality error code on the payout display unit 13 (step S301), and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, the data stored in the RAM 41c is compared by comparing the RAM parity calculated at the time of power-off with the RAM parity calculated at the time of startup. It is determined whether or not it is normal, and the routine proceeds to RAM abnormality error processing. In the RAM abnormality error process, since the RAM abnormality error code is displayed on the payout display 13, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled.

  If the RAM parity does not match, the interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, once the RAM abnormality error process is started, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state until the interrupt prohibition is canceled. Even if the power is cut off, the power interruption processing is not performed. In other words, since no new RAM parity is calculated and stored in the power interruption processing, the RAM is always stored except when the setting key switch 37 is activated even when the main control unit 41 is activated. Since the parities do not match, the main control unit 41 cannot be activated to start (resume) the game.

  Once the RAM abnormal error state is entered, the setting key switch 37 is activated and the setting change process is performed until a new setting value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. The game cannot be progressed. In other words, in the state that has shifted to the RAM abnormal error state, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is started on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38 ( Can be resumed). In an error state other than an abnormal RAM error, there is no problem of inconsistency in RAM parity. Therefore, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is released only by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and the game is resumed. Can do.

  As described above, when the game can be progressed, the game processing is repeated one by one in the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And It should be noted that the command transmission from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 will be described only for those necessary for the explanation of the present invention, and the explanation for the command transmission that is not so will be omitted.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a game control process performed by the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40 for each game. This process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. Thus, a BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed (step S401). If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ). Details of the BET process will be described later.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process for determining whether or not to perform is performed (step S402). In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Details of the lottery process will be described later.

  When the lottery process is completed, a reel rotation process is performed (step S403). In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 333SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is satisfied, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R starts and stops, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively. Details of the reel rotation process will be described later.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-described role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping (step S404). ). If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning determination command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90. Details of the winning determination process will be described later.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed (step S405). In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. Various processes not related to winning are also performed (for example, processing related to end control of big bonuses, erasure of winning flags not carried forward (single bonus, winning flags such as small roles), etc.). In the payout process, the winning flags of big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), and regular bonus (2) stored in the special work are not erased. As a result, the winning flags of big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus (1), and regular bonus (2) are carried over to the next game. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Details of the payout process will be described later. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  Next, the BET process in step S401 will be described in detail. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing in detail the BET process executed by the main CPU 41a in step S401. In the BET process, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (step S501). Next, whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not the replay game flag based on the previous game replay winning is set in the RAM 41c (step S502).

  If it is determined that the game is a replay game, the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S503), a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is generated, and transmitted to the effect control board 90. (Step S504). In addition, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (the replay is not selected by lottery during the regular bonus, so 3 in the case of YES in S502) (step S505). The processes in steps S503 and S504 are repeated until the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number. When the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number, the process waits in a state waiting for detection of the operation of the start switch 7 (step S506). . When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the game is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S507). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c is 50 (step S508). If the value of the credit counter is 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path set as the payout side (step S509). Then, the process proceeds to step S511. When the value of the BET counter is not a prescribed number, or when the value of the credit counter is not 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal flow path can be inserted with the medal flow path set to the hopper tank 34a side. (Step S510). Then, the process proceeds to step S511.

  If both the value of the credit counter and the value of the BET counter are 0, or if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal (step S514). . If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S515). If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S516), a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is generated, and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S516). S517). Then, the process returns to step S507.

  If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 (step S518). If the value of the credit counter is 50, the process returns to step S507 as it is. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the value of the credit counter is incremented by 1 (step S519).

  If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S520). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 7 has been detected (step S521). If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process returns to step S507. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path as the payout side. Further, the operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 are invalidated (step S522). Then, the BET process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S523). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the process returns to step S507. If the value of the credit counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected by the single BET switch 5 (step S524). If the operation of the single BET switch 5 has not been detected, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected by the MAXBET switch 6 (step S525). If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected, the process returns to step S507.

  If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the credit counter value is decremented by 1 (step S526), the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S527), and the current BET counter value is set. A BET command shown is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S528). Then, the process returns to step S507.

  If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S529). If the credit counter value is not 0, the credit counter value is decremented by 1 (step S530), the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S531), and a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is issued. It produces | generates and transmits to the production | presentation control board 90 (step S532). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter has reached a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S533). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the process returns to step S507. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to step S529. If it is determined in step S529 that the value of the credit counter is 0, the process returns to step S507.

  Next, the payment process in step S513 will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing in detail the settlement process executed by the main CPU 41a in step S513. In the settlement process, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path set as the payout side (step S601). Further, the hopper motor 34b is driven to be turned on (step S602).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the BET number is to be settled (step S603). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0. When it is not 0, it is determined that the BET number is to be settled, and when it is 0, it is determined that the BET number is not to be settled.

  When it is determined that the BET number is to be settled, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (step S609), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (step S610). When it is determined in step S610 that the value of the BET counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S609, and when it is determined that the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S611. When it is determined that the value of the BET counter is 0, a BET cancellation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the BET number is not settled, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S604). When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated without paying out medals. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (step S606), and it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter has become 0 (step S607). When it is determined in step S607 that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S606, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S611. When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, a credit return command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In step S611, the hopper motor 34b is turned off to stop driving. Then, the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  Next, the lottery process in step S402 described above will be described in detail. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the lottery process executed by the main CPU 41a in step S402. In the lottery process, the number of bets (the number of bets) set in the current game is read (step S701). Next, it is determined whether or not the read bet number is a prescribed number (for example, 1 or 3) (step S702). When the read number of bets is not the prescribed number, a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. 21 is performed. When the read number of bets is the specified number, the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is read. Here, it is determined whether or not the read setting value is in the range of 1 to 4 that is a value that should be originally taken (step S704). If the read set value is not in the range of 1 to 4, a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. 21 is performed.

  If the read set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the lottery target combination corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially read out of the lottery target combinations registered in the winning combination table described above (step S705). Next, the setting state of the common flag registered in the role-specific table for the read lottery target is referred (step S706), and it is determined whether or not the common flag is in an ON state (step S707).

  If the common flag is ON, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the gaming state is acquired for the read lottery target character (step S708). Then, the process proceeds to step S710. If the common flag is not in the ON state, the setting value set in the RAM 41c is read, and the determination value stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the gaming state and the setting value for the lottery target role The number is acquired (step S709). Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, the random number for internal lottery stored in the determination area of the RAM 41c (the random number extracted from the random number generating circuit 42, the random number extracted from the random number generating circuit 42 is converted into software by using the number of determination values acquired in step S708 or S709. (Including random numbers processed in a predetermined procedure, random numbers added in step S710, etc.), and the result of the addition is used as a new random number for internal lottery. Then, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (step S711).

  If no overflow has occurred, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations to be selected (step S712). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to step S705, and the process continues with the next lottery target registered in the winning combination table as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the process proceeds to step S721.

  If an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, the winning flag of the lottery object combination read in step S705 is set to ON. When the read lottery winning combination is a plurality of winning combinations, the winning flag of each of the plurality of winning combinations is set to ON. In the case where a big bonus or a regular bonus is included in the lottery object combination, the value of the RT2 counter indicating that it is controlled by RT2 is set to 1, and the gaming state is controlled by RT2. If the value of the RT1 counter indicating that the RT1 is controlled is set, it is initialized to 0 and the value of the RT2 counter is set to 1. The values of various flags and various counters are stored and updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  In step S721, an internal winning command is generated according to the setting state of the winning flag in the RAM 41c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Then, the lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the reel rotation process in step S403 will be described in detail. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the reel rotation process executed by the main CPU 41a in step S403. In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (for example, about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (step S801), and if the wait time has not elapsed, Wait until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, a new wait time is set and the timing is newly started (step S802a). The wait time is measured by subtracting and updating values stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at predetermined intervals.

  Next, a work initialization code at the time of starting the rotation of the reel motor is set in the register, and the rotation of the reel is started (step S803). Here, a reel rotation command indicating that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have started to rotate is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S804). Then, with reference to the table index, the table creation data is identified, and based on the identified table creation data, a stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the internal winning situation, and the other reels stop situation is created. Then, it is created for each reel being rotated (step S805), and a work initialization code at the time of completion of stop preparation is set in the register (step S806a). Thereby, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any valid operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R has been detected (step S807). If no stop switch operation is detected, it is determined whether or not a reel rotation error (error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 for a certain period or longer) has occurred (step S808). ). If no reel rotation error has occurred, the process returns to step S807.

  If it is determined in step S808 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating the reel rotation error is set in the register (step S809), and the process proceeds to a predetermined error process (step S810b). Along with this, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is also temporarily stopped. If the error is released, the process returns to step S803 again, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is resumed.

  If operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected in step S807, the reel motor (any one of 32L, 32C, 32R) corresponding to the operated stop switch from the reel reference position at that time. The number of steps (stop operation position) is acquired, the number of frames to be drawn is specified with reference to the stop control table of the corresponding reel, and the stop position is set to the work corresponding to the stop reel (step S811). Here, a reel stop command indicating the type of reel to be stopped and the symbols to be stopped for the reel is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S812). After that, it waits until the rotation of the reel (2L, 2C, or 2R) corresponding to the operated stop switch stops (step S813).

  Then, when the rotation of the reel (2L, 2C, 2R) corresponding to the operated stop switch stops, it is determined whether or not all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (step S814). If the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not stopped, the process returns to step S805. If the rotations of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the winning determination process in step S404 will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the winning determination process executed by the main CPU 41a in step S404. In the winning determination process, the winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is read in order from the beginning (step S901). Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the read combination is aligned with any of the five winning lines L1 to L5 (step S902).

  If the symbol combination of the combination is complete, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c (step S903), and the process proceeds to step S904. If the symbol combination of the combination is not complete, the process proceeds to step S904 as it is. In step S904, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been determined as a winning determination among the combinations corresponding to the gaming state. If there is a winning combination that has not yet been determined for winning, the process returns to step S901, and the next winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is read out.

  If all of the winning combinations according to the game state are targeted for winning determination, it is next determined whether or not the replay winning is made depending on whether or not the replay (1) or replay (2) winning flag is set in the RAM 41c. (Step S905).

  If no replay prize has been won, it is determined whether or not a big bonus or regular bonus has been won depending on whether a big bonus or regular bonus prize flag is set in the RAM 41c (step S906). If a prize has been won, a bonus medium flag corresponding to the bonus won in the RAM 41c (for example, a big bonus (1) medium flag at the time of winning a big bonus (1), a regular bonus (2) a regular bonus (2) medium flag at the time of winning. ) Is set to the ON state, and the winning flag corresponding to the winning bonus is set to the OFF state. Also, the value of the RT2 counter set in the RAM 41c at the time of winning the bonus is initialized and the RT is terminated, and the value of the bonus counter (B counter) indicating the remaining payout number is a value (for example, big) If it is a bonus, it is set to 270, and if it is a regular bonus, it is set to 70) (step S907). In step S907, a bonus winning effect waiting time for controlling the frozen state after the big bonus or regular bonus winning is further set. Then, the process proceeds to step S913. Further, during the period in which the bonus flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus is controlled for each game.

  If no big bonus or regular bonus has been won, whether or not a single bonus has been won is determined based on whether or not a single bonus prize flag is set in the RAM 41c (step S908). If a single bonus has been won, the RAM 41c sets the single bonus flag to the ON state, and if the value of the RT1 counter is set to 1, it is initialized and RT1 is terminated (step). S909), the process proceeds to step S913. If no single bonus has been won, the process proceeds directly to step S913.

  In step S913, the type of winning combination based on the winning flag set in the ON state in the RAM 41c (the winning flag is not set in the case of deviation) and the number of medals to be paid out with the winning are displayed. The winning determination command shown is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90. Then, the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the payout process in step S405 described above will be described in detail. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the payout process executed by the main CPU 41a in step S405. In the payout process, first, a winning flag set to ON in the RAM 41c is read (step S1001), and the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the winning flag read in step S1001 is a winning flag for a small combination of grapes, melons, cherries and fifteen winning combinations. It is determined whether or not there is a small role winning (step S1002). If the small role is not won, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  If the small role is won, by controlling the hopper 80, the number of medals is paid out or credits are added (step S1003), and the number of payouts is counted (step S1004). The number of payouts counted in step S1004 is stored in the RAM 41c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  Here, it is determined in step S1002 that a small role has not been won, or it is determined in step S1004 that one game has been completed by counting the number of payouts. In other words, if the small role is won, it is determined that the game is over when the payout of the medals is completed and the number of payouts is counted, but if the small role is not won, the medals are not paid out. This is the same as determining that the game is over when all reels have stopped rotating.

  In step S1009, depending on whether or not the bonus-in-progress flag is set to ON in the RAM 41c, the current gaming state is during the big bonus, the regular bonus, or the single bonus (in any case, excluding the game that won the bonus). It is determined whether or not there is. If the current gaming state is not in bonus, the process proceeds to step S1009c.

  When it is determined that the current gaming state is in bonus, it is determined whether or not a single bonus is in effect (step S1009a). If it is determined that the single bonus is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1010, which will be described later, because the big bonus is being performed or the regular bonus is being performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the single bonus is in progress, the single bonus in-progress flag is set to the OFF state (step S1009b), and the process proceeds to step S1009c.

  In step S1009c, it is determined whether the values of the RT1 counter and the RT2 counter indicating that the RT1 or RT2 is controlled are 0, that is, whether the RT1 or RT2 is not controlled. When it is determined that the values of the RT1 counter and the RT2 counter are 0, that is, it is not during RT, it is determined whether or not 15 winning combinations have won (step S1009d). When it is determined that the 15 winning combination has not won, the process proceeds to step S1023 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that 15 winning combinations are won, the value of the RT1 counter indicating that the RT1 is controlled is set to 1, and the gaming state is controlled to RT1 (step S1009e). Proceed to processing.

  In step S1009c, when it is determined that one of the values of the RT1 counter and the RT2 counter is not 0, that is, during RT, it is determined whether the value of the RT1 counter is 1, that is, whether it is during RT1. (Step S1009f). When it is determined that RT1 is being performed, it is determined whether or not the RT end symbol has been derived (stopped) (step S1009g). When it is determined that the RT end symbol is stopped, the RT1 counter value set in the RAM 41c is initialized to end RT1 (step S1009h), and the process proceeds to step S1023. On the other hand, if NO is determined in step S1009f or step S1009g, the process proceeds to step S1023 without performing the process in step S1009h.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1009a that the current gaming state is not a single bonus, the value obtained by subtracting the number of payouts counted in step S1004 from the value of the bonus counter in the RAM 41c is updated as the value of the bonus counter. The number counter is cleared and initialized (step S1010). The process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1010, the number of games and prizes in the bonus are counted using the counter of the RAM 41c.

  In step S1013, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus counter is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of medals has been paid out corresponding to the bonus. When it is determined that the value of the bonus counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1023. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bonus counter is 0, it is determined whether or not a big bonus is being performed (step S1014). When it is determined that a big bonus is in progress, the big bonus medium flag set to ON is set to OFF, and the counter value for counting the number of games and winnings in the big bonus is cleared and initialized. (Step S1015), and the process proceeds to step S1023. In step S1015, an ending effect waiting time for controlling the frozen state after the end of the big bonus is set. When it is determined in step S1014 that the big bonus is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1017.

  In step S1017, it is determined whether the regular bonus is being performed. When it is determined that the regular bonus is in effect, the regular bonus medium flag that is set to the ON state is set to the OFF state, and the counter value for counting the number of games and winnings in the regular bonus is cleared to the initial value. (Step S1018), and the process proceeds to step S1023. In step S1018, an ending effect waiting time for controlling the frozen state after the regular bonus is over is set. When it is determined in step S1017 that the regular bonus is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1023.

  In step S1023, based on the big bonus medium flag, the regular bonus medium flag, the single bonus medium flag, and the RT counter in the RAM 41c, a gaming state command indicating a gaming state to be applied in the next game is generated and effect control is performed. It transmits to the board | substrate 90 (step S1023). Then, the payout process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 22 to complete the process for one game.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40 shifts the game state among the initial game state, RT1, RT2, big bonus, regular bonus, and single bonus, and the progress of the game In response to this, a command is transmitted to the effect control board 90. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs an original effect based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, various control contents executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  In the effect control board 90, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board 101, the sub-control unit 91 is activated. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91. When the effect control main process is started, first, a predetermined effect initial setting process is executed (Ss1). Details of the effect initial setting process will be described later.

  When the effect initial setting process is completed, an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 such as the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state when the power supply is stopped is executed (Ss2). Details of the effect control restoration process will also be described later.

  After executing the effect control restoration process, after interrupting is prohibited (Ss3), the effect side random value update process is executed (Ss4), and the interruption is permitted (Ss5). . The effect random number value update process executed in Ss4 is a process for updating all or part of the random value used on the effect control board 90 side by software.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail an effect initial setting process executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in Ss1 of FIG. In the effect initial setting process, first, interruption is prohibited (Ss101), and an interrupt mode is set (Ss102).

  Next, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of the designated address of the stack pointer, are performed (Ss103). Also, the built-in device register is set (initialized) in the sub-control unit 91 (Ss104). Then, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in peripheral circuits in the sub-control unit 91, are set (initialized) (Ss105). Thereafter, the RAM 91c is set to be accessible (Ss106).

  Thereafter, the VDP 141 is initialized, for example, after transmitting a predetermined initialization signal to the VDP 141 and then transmitting initial setting data for setting in the internal register of the VDP 141 (Ss107). Thereby, in the VDP 141, for example, the storage contents of the temporary storage memory 155 and the frame buffer memory 156 are initialized based on the initialization signal and the initialization data received from the sub-control unit 91, the transfer control circuit 152, the drawing circuit, and the like. 154 or the moving picture decoder 158 or the like is interrupted, or the storage area in the frame buffer memory 156 corresponding to the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is assigned to set the display area. When the display image update cycle in the liquid crystal display 51 is set, at least one of various setting operations performed is executed.

  Next, for example, setting for generating a random number used on the side of the effect control board 90 is performed such as setting the operation of the random number circuit 134 based on the random number initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss108). Further, for example, an interrupt is set by setting a reset / interrupt controller or a CTC register based on the interrupt initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss109). Thereby, in the sub-control unit 91, a timer interrupt for controlling the rendering operation is generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). Then, the effect initial setting process ends.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect control restoration process executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in Ss2 of FIG. First, a data check of the RAM 91c is performed to determine whether the check result is normal (Ss201). In this process, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the calculated checksum and an effect checksum buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 91c are stored. Compare with checksum. The effect checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. This effect checksum buffer is included in the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the contents of the effect checksum buffer are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. If the comparison result between the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the effect checksum buffer does not match, it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  When the check result of the data in the RAM 91c is normal, it is determined whether or not the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is ON (Ss202). The state of the effect backup flag is set in the effect control flag setting unit when the power supply is stopped. And the setting location of this production backup flag is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped.

  When the production backup flag is ON, the production backup flag is cleared to the OFF state (Ss203), and then the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped. Setting is made (Ss204). For example, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 91b is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 91c. Here, when the work area of the RAM 91c is backed up by a backup power source, it is only necessary to set initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area in the backup setting table. Subsequently, the effect backup data for restoring the control state is read from the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the setting of the built-in register of the sub CPU 91a and the work area of the RAM 91c is set according to the read data. The state before the controller 91 is restarted is restored.

  Thereafter, based on the setting in step Ss204, for example, a display control command corresponding to the restored state is transmitted to the VDP 141, and various settings in the VDP 141 are resumed (Ss205). Note that after executing the process of Ss205, for example, the process may return to the process corresponding to the contrast value set in the program counter by the return of the control state in Ss204.

  If the data check result of the RAM 91c is abnormal in Ss201, or if the effect backup flag is OFF in Ss202, the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss206). Subsequent to the initialization of the RAM 91c, the initial setting for setting the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the initial state is performed (Ss207).

  In the effect control recovery process, when a power-on command is received from the main control unit 41, a liquid crystal display is used if it is a power-on command indicating that a special role (a big bonus and a regular bonus in the effect control recovery process) is won. In the case of 51, etc., a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and then the control is continued until the special role is won. The process ends.

  Also, in the production control recovery process, until the power-on command or initialization command is received, even if the production backup is normal, it does not return to the production state, and even if other commands are received, The production is not controlled. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special announcement and the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won.

  That is, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is transmitted. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating the winning, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating the winning of the special role, and avoids receiving the power-on command on the side of the sub-control unit 91 to notify the winning of the special role. Since it is impossible to avoid the execution of the production, when the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption and the special role is elected before the power interruption as described above, The winning of special role will be notified.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt for controlling the progress of the production at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) according to the setting of the interrupt in Ss109, and the timer / allocation of the RAM 91c is performed by the reset / interrupt controller. Is set to the ON state. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an effect control interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in response to the timer interrupt flag being set to the ON state.

  In the effect control interrupt process, first, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (Ss301), and the contents of the internal register are saved (Ss302). Next, an effect backup process, which will be described later in detail, is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, data necessary for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up (Ss303). Then, the reset circuit 95 is cleared by setting control data for turning on the initialization signal in a predetermined output port included in the I / O port 91d (Ss304).

  Next, a command analysis process for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed (Ss305), and an effect control process described in detail later is executed (Ss306). By this effect control process, various effects are performed by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating a game sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Next, a volume adjustment process to be described later is executed (Ss306a). By this volume adjustment process, the volume of the game sound generated from the speakers 53 and 54 is adjusted according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Next, effect random number value update processing is performed, and various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the effect control board 90 side (Ss307). Thereafter, the contents of the register saved in Ss302 are restored (Ss308), and the effect control interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect backup process executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in Ss303 of FIG. In the effect backup process, data for effect backup is set using stored data in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss401). Here, for example, depending on the values of various flags provided in the effect flag setting unit of the RAM 91c and the values of various timers provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 91c, the control state in the sub control unit 91 and the display control circuit 92 If the progress of various processes can be specified, the production backup data may be configured by data indicating the values of these flags and timers. For example, if the control state of the sub control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 can be specified from the stored value of the built-in register (for example, program counter) of the sub CPU 91a, the storage of such built-in register is possible. The production backup data may be constituted by data indicating values. Alternatively, the effect backup data may be configured by combining data indicating the value of the flag or timer and data indicating the stored value of the built-in register. In addition, even if any data that can be recovered after restarting by specifying the control state in the sub-control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 is included in the production backup data Good.

  Next, check data is created, for example, by calculating a checksum using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss402). And the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting part of RAM91c is set to ON state (Ss403), and effect backup processing is complete | finished. When a part of the RAM 91c is backed up by the backup power source, the production backup data created in Ss401, the check data created in Ss402, the data indicating the production backup flag set in the ON state in Ss403, etc. Then, it may be stored in the backup area of the RAM 91c at the end of the effect backup process.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process and the volume adjustment process executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in Ss306 and Ss306a of FIG.

  FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the effect control process. In the effect control process, the sub CPU 91a performs a demonstration effect execution process for executing a demonstration effect (step Ss501) and performs other processes (step Ss504) when the demonstration period is described later. The demo period is, for example, a period excluding a continuous production and a bonus production being executed, and is a period from when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the game ends until a BET command is newly received. Thereby, for example, in the demonstration period, a predetermined demonstration effect is executed until a new BET command is received.

  When starting the demonstration effect, the sub CPU 91a outputs a demonstration effect start signal for instructing the demonstration effect start to the display control circuit 92. When the display control circuit 92 receives the demonstration effect start signal, the display control circuit 92 reads effect data for performing the demonstration effect from the CGROM 142, stores it in the temporary storage memory 155, and the image data drawn in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154 The display circuit 157 starts a predetermined demonstration effect on the liquid crystal display 51.

  On the other hand, in the effect control process, a game effect execution process for executing a game effect (including a continuous effect) according to the game state is performed when it is outside the demonstration period (step Ss502). Further, when a predetermined notification condition is established, a navigation execution process for executing a navigation effect that notifies the winning combination is performed (step Ss503), and other processes are performed (step Ss504). The predetermined notification condition is, for example, a condition established by winning a single bonus + melon or single bonus when controlled by RT1. In the present embodiment, as a predetermined notification condition, a condition that is established by winning a single bonus + melon or a single bonus when controlled by RT1 has been described as an example. It may be a condition established by winning a predetermined winning combination (such as melon). Then, a navigation effect (notifying that a melon has been won) may be executed in a manner corresponding to a predetermined notification condition. In addition, in the game where RT1 is in progress and replay (1) + replay (2) is won, a navigation effect is provided to notify that replay (1) + replay (2) is won. It may be executed. As a result, when a navigation effect that informs that the replay (1) + replay (2) has been won is performed, an operation for avoiding the above-described single bonus winning is practiced, and the replay is performed. The player can confirm whether the operation is successful or unsuccessful depending on whether or not (2) is won.

  When starting a game effect, the sub CPU 91a outputs a game effect start signal instructing the start of the corresponding game effect to the display control circuit 92. When receiving the game effect start signal, the display control circuit 92 reads effect data for performing the corresponding game effect from the CGROM 142, stores it in the temporary storage memory 155, and the image drawn in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154. The game effect corresponding to the liquid crystal display 51 is started by the display circuit 157. When the effect data for performing the continuous effect is stored in the temporary storage memory 155, the game is not performed for a predetermined time without betting, for example, until the continuous effect ends. However, the display control circuit 92 prohibits writing to the temporary storage memory 155 and performs other effects such as a demonstration effect so that the effect data for performing the demonstration effect is not stored in the temporary storage memory 155. Absent.

  Further, in other processing, for example, processing for generating game sounds corresponding to the game effects from the speakers 53 and 54 is performed. When performing an effect of generating game sound from the speakers 53 and 54, the sub CPU 91a outputs a command signal for generating a game sound corresponding to the game effect to the audio output circuit 94.

  In other processing, for example, a predetermined game history is displayed on a liquid crystal display based on the player's touch panel operation during a period other than during the continuous production and during the execution of the bonus production, and when no game is being performed. A history display effect execution process for executing a history display effect to be displayed on the display 51 is performed. Note that while the continuous production is being executed, the operation of the touch panel is invalidated so that the history display production is not executed.

  Here, the contents of the game effect execution process and the navigation execution process executed by the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 will be described based on the timing chart shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 36, the passage of time is shown on the horizontal axis, the gaming state is shown in the (a) column, the gaming effect is shown in the (b) column, and the RT1 is in the (c) column. The single bonus + melon and single bonus winning status are shown, and the execution of the navigation effect is shown in the (d) column. Note that the circled numbers shown in the lower column of FIG. 36 indicate the timing in each of (a) to (d). Hereinafter, the numbers are simply expressed as timing 1 to timing 18.

  Timing 1 indicates the timing when the game is controlled to the initial gaming state and the normal performance is performed. At the timing 1, the initial gaming state is controlled as shown in the (a) column, and the normal performance performed during the initial gaming state is performed as shown in the (b) column.

  Timing 2 indicates the timing when the single bonus is won in the initial gaming state and the single bonus production is started. At timing 2, the bonus is controlled as shown in the (a) column, and the single bonus medium effect is started as shown in the (b) column.

  Timing 3 shows the timing when winning a 15-piece combination in the single bonus. At timing 3, RT1 is controlled as shown in the (a) column, and a high-probability continuous effect during RT1 is started as shown in the (b) column.

  Timing 4 shows the timing when a single bonus is won during RT1. At timing 4, a single bonus is won as shown in the (c) column, and a single winning effect (for example, a white character is notified) that only the single bonus is won as shown in the (d) column. An effect to appear) is executed as a navigation effect. Thereby, the player can recognize that the end of RT1 cannot be avoided.

  Timing 5 shows the timing when winning a single bonus. At timing 5, a single bonus winning is controlled to a single bonus as shown in the (a) column, and an effect during the single bonus is started as shown in the (b) column.

  Timing 6 shows the timing when winning a 15-piece combination in the single bonus. At timing 6, control is again performed at RT1 as shown in the (a) column, and the high-probability continuous effect during RT1 is resumed as shown in the (b) column.

  In addition, while controlled by RT1, a high-probability continuous effect is executed, but the mode (effect content) of the high-probability continuous effect may be changed according to the number of times of continuous control performed by RT1. . For example, RT1 started at timing 3 in FIG. 36 is continuously controlled over a period from timing 6 to timing 11 with a single bonus winning at timing 5 interposed therebetween. For this reason, you may vary the aspect of a high-probability continuous production in the period of timing 3-timing 5, and the period of timing 6-timing 11.

  Further, the number of medals acquired while the RT1 is continuously controlled may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 or the game auxiliary display 12. For example, every time a medal is acquired from time 3 to time 5 in FIG. 36, the number of medals may be counted and the total number of medals may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, since it is controlled again to RT1 at the timing 6, the medal number is displayed again during the period from the timing 6 to the timing 11, and the medals obtained for the total medal number counted until the timing 5 are obtained. The total number of medals obtained by adding the number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The display of the total number of medals is displayed while continuously controlled at RT1, and the count of the total number of medals is reset once it is controlled to the initial gaming state.

  Timing 7 shows the timing when a single bonus + melon is won during RT1. At timing 7, a single bonus and melon are won simultaneously as shown in (c) column, and a single winner and melon are simultaneously won as shown in (d) column, and a double win is announced. An effect (for example, an effect of causing a red character to appear) is executed as a navigation effect. Thereby, the player can recognize that the RT1 can be continuously controlled by proceeding with the game so that the single bonus is not won and winning the melon. Therefore, after the player stops at least the middle reel 2C, the player operates the stop button 8L at the timing when the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 of the left reel 2L is positioned at the lower stage, and wins the melon to RT1. It can be recognized that continuous control is possible.

  Note that the timing 8 is the same as the timing 7, and thus the description thereof is omitted. In the present embodiment, an example in which a navigation effect is performed by winning a single bonus during RT1 will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of times that the navigation effect is performed after being controlled by RT1 (for example, after timing 3 and after timing 6) is set to a predetermined number (for example, up to 3 times). Also good. Specifically, the navigation effect is performed at the timing 8, but even if the single bonus is won at the later timing, the navigation effect is not performed, or it is notified that the single bonus is won, but the double winning is performed. You may comprise so that the production | generation which does not alert | report whether it is elected independently or is performed. Moreover, you may comprise so that a navigation effect may be determined at random according to a predetermined probability.

  Timing 9 indicates a timing when no winning combination is won during RT, that is, when the winning combination is lost. At timing 9, as shown in the column (b), a continuous production at the time of deviation is started. In addition, as the continuation effect at the time of losing, a predetermined continuation effect is performed over the following three games, and a big hit effect or losing effect that is executed based on whether a regular bonus or a big bonus is won at the end is performed. Since a single bonus is won at timing 10 as described later, a regular bonus or a big bonus is not won at timing 9, so a shift effect is performed at the end of the continuous effect at the start of timing 9.

  Timing 10 indicates the timing when a single bonus is won during RT1. At timing 10, a single bonus is won as shown in the (c) column, and a single winning effect (for example, a white character is notified) that only the single bonus is won as shown in the (d) column. An effect to appear) is executed as a navigation effect. Thereby, the player can recognize that the end of RT1 cannot be avoided.

  Timing 11 shows the timing when winning a single bonus. At the timing 11, the single bonus winning is controlled to the single bonus as shown in the (a) column, and the single bonus medium effect is started as shown in the (b) column.

  Timing 12 shows the timing when 15 winning combinations are not won in the single bonus. At the timing 12, the initial gaming state is controlled as shown in the (a) column, and the normal performance is started as shown in the (b) column. Note that the timings 13, 14, and 15 are the same as the timings 2, 3, and 7 described above, respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Timing 16 shows the timing when the deviation occurs during RT. At the timing 16, as shown in the column (b), a continuous production at the time of deviation is started. When the big bonus is won at timing 16, a big hit effect is performed at the end of the continuous effect at the time of losing.

  Timing 17 shows the timing when winning the big bonus. At timing 17, the big bonus winning is controlled to the big bonus as shown in the (a) column, and the big bonus medium effect is started as shown in the (b) column. Timing 18 indicates the timing when the big bonus ends, is controlled to the initial gaming state, and the normal performance is started.

  Note that when the player is controlled by RT1 and wins the replay (2), the above-described successful pressing effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily notify the player that the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is successful.

  Returning to FIG. 35, FIG. 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment processing. In the volume adjustment process, the sub CPU 91a minimizes (silences) the volume of the currently playing game sound when a predetermined silence condition is satisfied when the game sound is played at a normal volume (here, maximum). Silence processing (step Ss601) is performed. The predetermined mute condition is, for example, that a predetermined time has elapsed since the game state command was received (from the end of the previous game), a credit return command has been received (credit settlement), and a BET command has been received ( A predetermined time has elapsed since the BET operation was performed, a BET cancellation command was received (BET cancellation), and a predetermined time had elapsed since the internal winning command was received (from the start of the game) without receiving a reel stop command , And the fact that a predetermined time has passed without receiving a new reel stop command after receiving the reel stop command (after the stop operation).

  On the other hand, when the game sound is muted, a canceling process (step Ss602) is performed in which the muting is canceled when a predetermined canceling condition is satisfied and the game sound is output at a normal volume. The predetermined release condition refers to, for example, receiving a BET command, receiving an internal winning command, receiving a reel stop command, and the like.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) If a single bonus is won during RT1, RT1 ends. In the case of a single bonus, when a winning combination is made simultaneously with a melon, at least the middle reel 2C is stopped, and the stop button 8L is operated at the timing when the “melon” symbol of the area number 9 is positioned in the lower stage for the left reel 2L. Thus, winning can be avoided. In the above-described embodiment, only when the above-described single bonus winning operation is performed in a game that is won during Replay (1) + Replay (2) during RT1. Reel control is performed so as to win the replay (2). Therefore, the player can be made to recognize whether the operation for enabling the above-described single bonus winning is successful or unsuccessful depending on whether or not the replay (2) is won. . Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation practice for making it possible to avoid a single bonus winning without reducing the operating rate of the slot machine.

  When RT1 is in progress, replay (1) + replay (2) is won with high probability. For this reason, it is possible to provide more players with a game in which it is possible to confirm whether the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is successful or not without reducing the operating rate of the slot machine. In addition, when the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is successful, in order to win the replay (2), it is possible to substantially give the player a profit corresponding to the bet number of the next game. .

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, when winning a replay (2) while RT1 is in progress, a successful press effect is performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize in an easy-to-understand manner whether the operation for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is successful or unsuccessful.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, when the single bonus winning is generated, if the RT1 is controlled, the RT1 is terminated and the single bonus is controlled. In addition, during the single bonus, winning is performed in the internal lottery with a higher probability than when the 15-card combination that triggers the control of RT1 is in the initial gaming state. In this way, the single bonus that increases the probability of winning the 15-piece combination ends in one game. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the control to RT1 will be started or continued with the occurrence of a single bonus winning that ends RT1, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the player is not controlled by RT1, a player can have a sense of expectation that the probability of being controlled by RT1 increases due to the occurrence of a single bonus winning. On the other hand, when controlled to RT1, a single bonus prize is generated, so that the feeling of losing to the end of RT1 and the next one game is likely to generate 15 winning prizes. The player can have a sense of expectation for being played. In this way, it is possible to change the emotion that the player has when the single bonus winning is generated, depending on whether or not the currently controlled gaming state is in RT1.

  (4) With the single bonus in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17 (d), the winning combinations of 15 winning combinations and melons are increased. If the left and middle reels are stopped when the 15-card combination and melon are selected, “Melon-melon” is derived on the winning line, and either the 15-sheet combination or melon is selected according to the display result of the right reel. Become a double tempered state that can win a prize. For this reason, in particular, during the single bonus and while the right reel is rotating, it is possible to ask whether the melon prize will be generated or whether the 15-piece winning prize will be generated and controlled by RT1. Interest can be improved.

  Further, in the case where the 15-card combination or melon is won and the right reel is stopped last, it is possible to make a state where both the 15-sheet combination and the melon can be generated until the final stop. Thereby, when the right reel is stopped at the end, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for winning the 15 winning combination until the final stop and being controlled by RT1.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, even when it is determined that the generation of a big bonus or a regular bonus is permitted, the RT2 is controlled so that the probability of the replay (1) + (2) is higher than the initial gaming state. In addition, the pull-in control is performed in preference to the big bonus or regular bonus selected in the replay (1) and the replay (2). For this reason, it is possible to continue a state in which a re-game winning is generated and a special transfer winning is difficult to occur. For this reason, it can be difficult to determine whether the generation of a big bonus or a regular bonus is permitted from the combination of symbols that are derived and displayed, and the player is informed that the generation of a big bonus or a regular bonus is permitted. Can sustain the feeling of expectation it has.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, the demonstration effect and the history display effect are not executed during the execution of the continuous effect. In other words, the reading of the demonstration effect production data and the history display production effect data from the CGROM 142 and the writing to the production data area are prohibited. The data is not overwritten and deleted from the effect data area. Since it is not erased, there is no need to read the effect data of the continuous effect from the CGROM 142 and write it in the execution effect data area.

  For this reason, in order to execute a demonstration effect or a history display effect that is not directly related to the current game progress, the effect data of the continuous effect with a large amount of data is read from the CGROM 142, and the execution effect of the temporary storage memory 155 is executed. The overhead of processing to write in the data area is not duplicated. Since the operation of the touch panel is also invalidated during the execution of the continuous production, the production mode is not switched, and the production data corresponding to the same situation is read from the CGROM 142 without changing the production mode, and the temporary storage memory It is possible to prevent the overhead of having to write to the execution effect data area 155.

  Further, since the process for performing the continuous effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side, the control burden for performing the process on the game control board 40 side can be shared with the effect control board 90 side, and the control on the game control board 40 side The burden can be reduced.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before the power interruption is restored, and a special role (a big bonus or a regular bonus) is won before the power interruption. When the main CPU 41a transmits a power-on command indicating that the special role is won and the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the main CPU 41a executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, and this notice effect. Is continuously executed until a winning judgment command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won.

  (8) Further, until the sub control unit 91 receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized, the effect state of the backup is normal. Even if another command is received, the production control is not performed accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special role and to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and from before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is always notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once in order to connect unauthorized devices such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power will cause a failure). Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing the gaming machine with the slot machine 1 set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool at the start of the business of the game shop.

  In addition, the notice effect is continuously executed until a winning judgment command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won, so that the special role is won, that is, the winning flag of the special role is set. The notification effect will not stop until it is cleared, and it will not be possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role election by the amusement store. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop can be further effectively prevented.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) In the above-described embodiment, when RT1 is being performed and replay (1) + replay (2) is won, operation practice for making it possible to avoid a single bonus winning is enabled. An example was described. However, the operation practice for making it possible to avoid the single bonus winning is not limited to this case, and can be executed, for example, in the initial gaming state and when the replay (1) + replay (2) is won. As described above, the reel control may be performed. In such a configuration, even when not controlled by RT1, it is possible to practice operation to avoid single bonus winning, without reducing the operating rate of the slot machine, More games can be provided to the player that can confirm whether the operation has succeeded or failed.

  When configured in this way, in the initial gaming state, when replay (1) + replay (2) is won, the player is made to recognize that the game is won by replay (1) + replay (2). In addition, a predetermined effect (a predetermined lamp lighting, a predetermined character, an item display, a predetermined sound generation, etc.) may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game can be practiced to avoid the single bonus winning. For this reason, even if it carries out operation practice, it can prevent making it carry out to the time when it cannot be confirmed whether it succeeded or failed, ie, the labor of pushing can be prevented.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus (1), and the regular bonus (2) are displayed as the special transition prize display results, and the big bonus and the regular are displayed as the special gaming state. Each bonus was described as an example. However, the special game state is not limited to this. For example, for at least one reel (for example, the middle reel 2C), the maximum delay time from the operation timing of the stop switch to the stop is shortened, and a small role accompanied by paying out medals Even if the game includes a challenge bonus (CB) that is controlled over a plurality of games in a gaming state called a challenge time (CT) that allows winning (for example, melon, grapes, etc.) (the winning flag is forcibly set) Good. During the CB, the CT is repeatedly controlled until the number of medals paid out to the player after winning a prize becomes a predetermined number (for example, 120) or more.

  In the embodiment described above, when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won, and if RT1 is controlled, the RT1 is terminated and controlled to RT2, and the big bonus or regular bonus is won. An example of terminating RT2 has been described. However, in the slot machine that can be controlled by the CB as described above, the winning probability of the replay is not changed by winning the CB and winning the CB, that is, when the RT is controlled by the RT, You may comprise so that control to CB may be started, continuing without ending. Specifically, when the gaming state when winning the CB is RT1, the winning probability of replay (1) + replay (2) in RT1 is continued and the CB is controlled by CB winning. Also good. When configured in this way, during CB, winning flags such as melon and grape are forcibly set, and winning flags for replay (1) and replay (2) are set with high probability. When the winning flags of melon, grape, replay (1) and replay (2) are set, the replay (1) and replay (2) have priority over the symbols constituting melon and grape in each reel. The stop control of the reels for drawing the symbols constituting the above into the upper, middle and lower stages is performed. In addition, when the winning flags of melon, grape, replay (1) and replay (2) are set, the symbols constituting the replay (1) and replay (2) can be drawn into the upper, middle and lower stages. When the replay (1) and the replay (2) cannot be won, the reel stop control is performed, for example, to draw the symbols constituting the melon into the upper, middle and lower stages. For this reason, during CB, when replay is won, replay is preferentially won, but when replay winning is impossible, melon wins, for example. Thus, during the CB in which the control is started while being controlled by RT1, the replay (1) or the replay (2) is preferentially won and the replay (1) or the replay (2) is not won. When it is impossible to win a prize, a melon is awarded and a medal is paid out. For this reason, during the CB in which the control is started while being controlled by RT1, a melon prize can be generated when no replay prize is generated. The degree of advantage for the person is high. Therefore, when the player is controlled by RT1, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for further CB winning and being controlled by the CB, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, although RT1 in the above-described embodiment has been described with respect to an example in which a big bonus or regular bonus is won, a single bonus is won, or an RT finish symbol is derived, the RT1 is further controlled. The control on RT1 may be terminated on condition that the number of games digested after reaching a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 games).

  In such a configuration, in the CB further controlled by winning the CB while being controlled by RT1, a melon winning is generated by making the replay winning impossible and the player in the CB with a smaller number of games. The player should play the game so that the number of medals paid out at the time reaches a predetermined number. For this reason, in CB controlled by winning a CB when controlled by RT1, it is possible to improve technical intervention and improve the interest of the game.

  For example, when the maximum delay time from the operation timing of the stop switch 8C to the stop of the middle reel 2C is shortened during CT (for example, 75 milliseconds, the number of frames that can be drawn is 0 to 1), FIG. When the stop switch 8C is operated at the timing when the “grape” symbol of area number 12 is positioned in the lower row, the symbol “banana” on the middle reel that constitutes the replay cannot be pulled in. However, it is possible to disable replay winning. Accordingly, when the stop switch 8C is operated at the timing when the “grape” symbol of the area number 12 is positioned at the lower stage in the CB controlled by further winning the CB while being controlled by the RT1, with reference to FIG. Melon can be won without replay. As a result, the number of medals paid out to the player in the CB with a smaller number of games can be made to reach a predetermined number, so that the remaining number of games in RT1 after the CB ends can be increased. it can.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, 15 winning combinations have been described as an example of the advantageous winning display result. However, the advantageous winning display result may be a winning combination that triggers control to a gaming state (RT, AT, etc.) advantageous to the player. Further, a plurality of types of advantageous winning display results may be set (for example, 15 winning combinations a, 15 winning combinations b, 15 winning combinations c, etc.). These multiple types of advantageous winning display results are determined so that the derivation is allowed with a higher probability in the special game than in the initial game state (for example, the determination value number is 1), and the probabilities are different from each other. A number (for example, as the number of determination values, 15 winning combinations a: 5000, 15 winning combinations b: 10000, 15 winning combinations c: 17768) may be set.

  In addition, although RT1 has been described as an example of the gaming state controlled when the advantageous winning display result is derived, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of RTs (for example, replay (1 ) + (2) winning probability may include RTa: 1/3, RTb: 1/4, RTc: 1/5).

  When configured in this manner, the main control unit 41 may be configured to control to a predetermined gaming state according to the type of the derived advantageous winning display result. Specifically, for example, when a 15 winning combination a win occurs, control is performed to RTa, when a 15 winning combination b winning occurs, control is performed to RTb, and when a 15 winning combination c winning occurs, control is performed to RTc. It may be configured. This makes it possible to vary the probability of occurrence of replay depending on the type of RT to be controlled. The type of RT is determined according to the type of the derived advantageous winning display result. As a result, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation against the fact that it is controlled to RT that is advantageous to the player according to the type of the advantageous winning display result that is derived, and to improve the interest of the game Can be made.

  When multiple types of advantageous winning display results are set in this way, as a special game, a plurality of types of special winning games with different probabilities of generating at least one advantageous winning display result among the multiple types of advantageous winning display results. The game may be controllable. Specifically, as a special game, it can be controlled to single bonuses (1) to (3), and a judgment value of at least one 15-piece combination among 15-piece combination a, 15-piece combination b, and 15-sheet combination c The number may be configured to be different from the number of determination values of the single 15-piece combination of other single bonuses (for example, the number of determination values of 15-piece combination a is any of single bonuses (1) to (3)). Is set differently depending on what is). As a result, depending on the type of controlled single bonus, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation that the RT is controlled to be advantageous to the player, and to improve the fun of the game. be able to.

  Further, as described above, when a plurality of types (for example, 15 winning combinations a, 15 winning combinations b, 15 winning combinations c, etc.) are set as the advantageous winning display results, the re-game high probability state control means Among the plurality of types of re-game high-probability states (RTa: 200 games, RTb: 150 games, RTc: 100 games) that are in the re-game high probability state and differ in the prescribed number of games, The re-game high probability state may be controlled accordingly. Specifically, for example, when a 15 winning combination a win occurs, control is performed to RTa, when a 15 winning combination b winning occurs, control is performed to RTb, and when a 15 winning combination c winning occurs, control is performed to RTc. It may be configured.

  (4) The role-specific table in the above-described embodiment is based on the currently controlled gaming state and the lottery target combination when the common flag is set, and the common flag is not set. In the case of a lottery target combination, each address is specified based on the set value, the currently controlled gaming state, and the lottery target combination. In the internal lottery, a lottery for the lottery target combination is performed using the number of determination values stored at the specified one address destination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the role-specific table is currently controlled with one address that specifies the number of determination values when in the initial gaming state, according to the currently controlled gaming state and the lottery target role. When the gaming state is different from the initial gaming state, another address that specifies the number of determination values to be added to the number of determination values in the initial gaming state is specified. Also good.

  For example, in the case where a single bonus has a higher winning probability than the initial gaming state, that is, a role having a larger number of determination values is a lottery target role, When the single bonus is in effect, one address specified during the initial gaming state and another address different from this address are determined based on the lottery target. May be configured to be specified. In other addresses, for example, the number of determination values corresponding to the amount of increase in the winning probability during single bonus from the number of determination values specified during the initial gaming state is stored.

  Specifically, in FIG. 17 described above, the number of judgment values for 15 winning combinations is 1 when in the initial gaming state, but is 32768 when in the single bonus. Therefore, it can be said that the 15-piece combination is a combination in which the winning probability is improved by the single bonus than in the initial gaming state. In the case where such a 15-card combination is a lottery target combination, when in the initial gaming state, one address storing “1” as the number of determination values is specified, and in a single bonus In some cases, based on the lottery target combination, one address specified when in the initial gaming state and an address storing 32768-1 = “32767” as the number of determination values different from this address are specified. It may be configured as described above. Then, “32768”, which is the sum of “1” specified from one address and “32767” specified from another address, is specified as the number of determination values for the 15-piece combination in the single bonus. It may be configured as follows.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the single bonus has been described as an example of the end display result. However, the end display result is not limited to this, and may be a winning combination that triggers control to a gaming state in which control is performed to derive an advantageous winning display result with a higher probability than the normal gaming state. Only a game may be a winning combination (one game CT winning combination) that triggers the above-described CT control.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, when the advantageous winning display result is derived, an example of controlling to the re-game high probability state in which the re-game winning display result is controlled with a higher probability than the normal gaming state. Explained. However, the gaming state to be controlled when the advantageous winning display result is derived is not limited to this, and may be any gaming state that is more advantageous than the initial gaming state for the player. It may be a procedure notification gaming state (AT) for notifying the type of the winning display result for which the effect is determined or the operating procedure (operation timing, operating order, etc.) for deriving the winning display result.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, the operation unit (start lever 7, single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, settlement switch 10, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, touch panel, setting key provided in the slot machine 1 When a specific operation of the switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, etc.) is detected, the RT state may be initialized (the value of the gaming state flag is updated to a value indicating the initial gaming state). For example, the specific operation may be a combination of predetermined operations of two or more operation units. However, the procedure may be completely different from the operation related to the setting change. The operation procedure may be a combination of other operations including some operations.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. The example in which the notification effect indicating the winning of the special role is executed when the sub control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role has been won has been described. However, not only a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, but also a notification effect that notifies the game state to be returned may be executed. For example, when the game state to be returned is the initial game state, the main CPU 41a transmits a power-on command indicating the initial game state and executes a notification effect indicating the initial game state to the sub-control unit 91. Also good. Further, when the game state to be returned is RT, the main CPU 41a may transmit a power-on command indicating the RT type and execute a notification effect indicating the RT type to the sub-control unit 91. Good. Note that the gaming state to be restored may be all the gaming states to be controlled (for example, the initial gaming state, RT1 to RT2, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) or a predetermined gaming state to be controlled. It may be a gaming state (for example, among the initial gaming state, RT1 to RT2, big bonus, regular bonus, etc., only the initial gaming state, big bonus, and regular bonus).

  In addition, as a notification device, a dedicated notification device may be provided, or the credit display device 11, the game auxiliary display device 12, the payout display device 13, and the sub control unit 91 that are directly controlled by the main control unit 41 control. You may utilize the indicator used in progress of games, such as the liquid crystal display 51. FIG.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, it may be configured to be controlled to RT after the end of a predetermined big bonus or after the end of a predetermined regular bonus. Further, the type of RT controlled after the end of a predetermined big bonus or after the end of a predetermined regular bonus is not limited to one type, but a plurality of types of RTs (for example, RTa to RTc) having different probabilities for winning replays or different numbers of prescribed games. Or the like). Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of RT is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this case, furthermore, at RT (here, RTa) controlled after the end of the predetermined big bonus or after the end of the predetermined regular bonus, at least the replay among a plurality of types of replays (for example, replay a to replay c). You may comprise so that the number of determination values may be set so that the probability of winning b and replay c will be higher than in the initial gaming state. Thereby, when controlled by RTa, the probability of winning replay b and replay c is improved. Replay b and replay c can be won only at RTa, and are not won in any gaming state other than the RTa (including those that are not read out as a lottery target combination and those with a judgment value of 0). May be.

  Furthermore, when the player wins Replay b when RTa, the player is controlled to an RT (in this case, RTb) that has a higher probability that the player will win the Replay a than RTa. When replay c is won, the probability of winning replay a is lower than when RTb is reached, and even when replay b is won, control is performed to RT that is disadvantageous for a player who is not controlled by RTb (here, RTc). You may comprise. As a result, when the player is controlled to RTa, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the replay b and being controlled by the RTb, and the user may feel uneasy about winning the replay c and being controlled by the RTc. In comparison with a slot machine that is not controlled by RTb or RTc, the interest of the game can be improved.

  RTa includes a plurality of types of RTs having different probabilities of at least one of the probability of winning replay b and the probability of winning replay c, and RT (big bonus) determined in advance according to the type of bonus that has been completed. (1) RTa at the end, big bonus (2) RTa 'at the end, regular bonus (1) RTa "at the end, etc.). In other words, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the bonus is controlled to a type of RTa that has a high probability of winning replay b, and more advantageous RTa depending on the type of bonus to be controlled. (The RT that has a high probability of winning Replay b) Can be compared with those controlled by the same RT regardless of the type of bonus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which RT1 ends is described on the condition that the RT end symbol is derived or that a big bonus or a regular bonus is won. However, the present invention is not limited to such a case, and RT1 is configured to end on the condition that, for example, RT end symbols have been derived or a predetermined number of games (100 times) have been consumed. Also good. When the big bonus or regular bonus is won while being controlled by RT1, the RT1 is continuously controlled until the winning big bonus or regular bonus is won, without being controlled by RT2. May be. Thus, even if the big bonus or the regular bonus is won if the big bonus or the regular bonus is not won, the RT can be controlled continuously until the won big bonus or the regular bonus is won. For this reason, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss due to the RT being terminated because the big bonus or the regular bonus has been won before the predetermined number of games is exhausted. . Also, especially during RT, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a bonus, replay is won with a very high probability, and control with replay is prioritized over control with bonus. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the player has won. In addition, since the bonus winning flag is carried over after the next game until winning, it is possible to win the winning bonus during the end after RT has reached the predetermined number of games. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus at the end of RT.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the constituent symbols of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are three sets of the same symbol has been described. However, the constituent symbols of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) may be a combination of different symbols in each of the reels 2L to 2R. For example, even if the composition pattern of the big bonus (1) is a combination of “red 7-grape-melon” and the composition pattern of the big bonus (2) is a combination of “grape-white 7-black BAR”. Good. Similarly, the combination of the symbols of the regular bonus (1) and the regular bonus (2) may be a combination of different symbols in each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Further, when configured in this manner, the bonus medium effect may be the same content regardless of the type of bonus so that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled.

  Furthermore, it may be configured to be controlled to RT after the end of a predetermined big bonus or after the end of a predetermined regular bonus. Then, when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, it may be notified whether or not the control is performed after the bonus is finished. The predetermined notification condition may be satisfied if, for example, the game is consumed a predetermined number of times in the bonus, a predetermined number of medals are paid out in the bonus, or the bonus is terminated. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, making it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it becomes impossible to specify whether or not the RT is controlled after the bonus is over. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect for notifying whether it is a big bonus or controlled by RT after the bonus ends, so that the effect of the game can be effectively enhanced by performing the effect. Can be improved.

  When configured as described above, a liquid crystal display having a virtual reel for variably displaying a plurality of types of effect symbols is provided separately from the variable display device 2 and more easily visible than the variable display device 2. Then, the sub-control unit 91 starts variably displaying the virtual reels when the reel rotation is started in the variable display device 2, and when the display result is derived in the variable display device 2, the display result for effect corresponding to the display result May be derived. Then, the sub-control unit 91 uses the first bonus display result (for example, red 7) as the effect display result when either the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is derived in the variable display device 2. -Red 7-Red 7) is derived, and when the regular bonus (1) or the regular bonus (2) is derived in the variable display device 2, the second bonus display result (for example, white 7- White 7-white 7) may be derived. This makes it possible to inform the player that the game has been controlled to the big bonus or the regular bonus in an easy-to-understand manner, but it is difficult to specify whether or not the bonus is controlled by RT by paying out the specified number and ending. Can be made.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, it has been explained that it may be configured to control to RT2 until winning the selected big bonus or regular bonus when the big bonus or regular bonus is won. . In this RT2, for example, on the condition that the bonus is won, the replay winning probability is improved from the initial gaming state, but there is a high possibility that the number of medals to be acquired is low as in the initial gaming state. That is, it may be configured to control the RT so that the expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted.

  In this configuration, when the RT2 is controlled on the condition that the bonus is won, for example, the type of the winning display result or the winning display result determined to be permitted to be derived by the predetermining means is derived. Determination of whether or not to control to a procedure notification gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a state of performing a navigation effect, AT) for notifying an operation procedure (operation timing, operation order, etc.) The number of AT continuing games to be controlled is determined, and when it is determined to control to AT, it may be configured to control to RT + AT until the number of AT continuing games is consumed or a bonus is won and RT is ended. And during RT + AT, the expected value of the number of medals earned per game is made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets by winning the selected small role according to the navigation effect without missing it. The number of medals owned by the player may be increased.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the special bonus winning display result has been described by taking the big bonuses (1), (2), the regular bonuses (1), (2), etc. as an example. However, the special transfer prize display result is not limited to these, for example, a challenge bonus that controls the gaming state in which the number of sliding symbols on a predetermined reel is limited and a prize is allowed for all small roles. Also good.

  (14) In the above embodiment, when the set value is changed, all the data in the RAM 41c is initialized except for the stack area being used. However, in order to initialize the data in the RAM 41c, a separate initialization operation is performed when changing the set value (for example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 turned ON, a data clear reset / It may be necessary to operate the setting switch 38). From the RAM abnormal error state, it may be possible to recover not only by simply changing the set value but also by initializing the data in the RAM 41c. Specifically, after a determination of YES in step S103 of FIG. 19, a step for determining whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is operated is provided, and the reset / setting switch 38 is operated by this step. When it is determined that the process has been performed, the process may proceed to step S109.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, all data in the RAM 41c are initialized in addition to the set value work, except for the stack area in use, in accordance with the change of the set value. However, not only the data in the RAM 41c other than the stack area being used is initialized in accordance with the change of the set value as described above, but an initialization operation separate from the operation for changing the set value. (For example, operation of the reset / setting switch 38), all data in the RAM 41c are initialized except for the set value work and the stack area in use, and set according to the change of the set value. A new set value may be stored in the value work.

  Specifically, after step S102 of FIG. 19 is performed, a step for determining whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is operated is provided, and the reset / setting switch 38 is operated by this step. When it is determined, a process for initializing all data in the RAM 41c except for the set value work and the stack area in use is performed, and a process for determining whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state. When the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state by this processing, the process proceeds to step S110, and when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, the processing for canceling the interrupt prohibition is performed. You may comprise so that it may progress to control processing. Note that, when the reset / setting switch 38 is not operated, the process may proceed to step S104. Thereby, it is possible to recover from the RAM abnormal error state by initializing the data in the RAM 41c by performing not only the setting value changing operation but also the initialization operation. Further, from the RAM abnormality error state excluding the set value abnormality, the data in the RAM 41c can be initialized and restored by performing only the initialization operation.

  (16) In the above embodiment, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (for each symbol) are defined for one revolution of the reel, and each area (area number) is defined as a stop control table. ), A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, a stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to an area in which one symbol varies. The reel stop control is performed by using, for example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) for each area less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. Reel stop control may be performed using a uniquely determined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor. Ri, it is possible to further diversify the stop position relative to the stop operation position. Also in this case, similarly to the selection of the stop control table in the above embodiment, it is possible to obtain an effect that the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  (17) In the above embodiment, the number of determination values stored at the address registered in the role-specific table is added to the random number for internal lottery, and when an overflow occurs as a result of the addition, Was supposed to win. On the other hand, the acquired number of determination values may be sequentially subtracted from the acquired internal lottery random value, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new internal lottery random value. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  (18) In the above embodiment, the internal lottery is performed by sequentially adding the number of determination values of each combination corresponding to the game situation to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows The role was determined to be a winner. On the other hand, a winning determination table in which a determination value for determining each combination as winning is determined for each game in accordance with the number of determination values for each combination according to the game situation, and the internal random number for internal lottery acquired It is also possible to perform an internal lottery by comparing the value of each with the determination value of each combination.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the determination value number storage area stores a determination value number in each case using a 2-byte area. However, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for a special combination cannot be set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. Thus, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  (20) In the above embodiment, the number of determination values is stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 4 or is stored individually for each of the setting values 1 to 4. . However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 4 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 3-4, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  (21) In the above embodiment, the variable display device 2 includes the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in which a plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portion, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate. The symbols are variably displayed by driving. However, a device that virtually displays a symbol on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be used instead of the variable display device 2 described above.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (23) In the above embodiment, the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 in response to the command to write the effect data from the sub-control unit 91, and the effect data in the temporary storage memory 155. It was supposed to be transferred to the area. Then, when the image data of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156, the effect data transferred to the effect data area is read. However, development of the image data in the frame buffer memory 156 is performed by an effect start command different from the command for transferring the effect data from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. On the other hand, if there is no effect continuously executed over a period of a plurality of games as a continuous effect as an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the CGROM 142 is used when starting each effect. The effect data can be transferred to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, and the expansion of the image data to the frame buffer memory 156 can be started as it is, and both need only output a command from the sub CPU 91a to the VDP 141. . In particular, if the display frequency is high, such as an image according to the effect mode, it is convenient to make it resident in the temporary storage memory 155.

  (24) In the above embodiment, the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. The stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating, and the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped reel or the stopped reel) Stop operation position) Another stop control table is registered in the ROM 41b in advance, and based on the table index, the required stop control table is specified according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop state. Enabled, when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel is stopped and the reel is still rotating. When there are still, by referring to the table index may be set a stop control table for each rotating reel.

  (25) In the above embodiment, among the plurality of stop control tables that uniquely determine the number of draw-in frames for the stop operation position, the internal winning state of each gaming state, the reel stop state (and the stopped state) The stop control table uniquely determined for the reel stop position or the stopped reel stop operation position) is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. A plurality of stop position specification tables that uniquely define stop positions are used in place of the stop control table, and when a stop operation is detected, the stop position specification table is referred to and unique corresponding to the stop operation position. Control may be performed to stop the reel at the stop position specified in FIG.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that are uniquely determined for the respective internal winning status of each gaming state, the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the number of frames to be pulled in, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. Kicking control (so-called control method control) may be performed in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. By performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position). Therefore, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  (26) In the above embodiment, each game state is uniquely determined for each internal winning state and the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped reel or the stopped operation position of the stopped reel). The selected control pattern is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern. At least the control pattern determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the selected control pattern is selected. As long as the reel stop control is performed according to the above.

  (27) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (28) In the embodiment described above, in the game that is won by replay (1) + replay (2), at least the middle reel 2C is stopped, and the “melon” of area number 9 for the left reel 2L. The reel control is performed so that the replay (2) is won only when the stop button 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol of the lower part is positioned at the lower stage. The example in which the reel control is performed so as to win the replay (1) when the operation is performed at a timing different from the timing at which the player is positioned. However, when the left melody 2L is operated at a specific timing such as the timing at which the "melon" symbol of the area number 9 is positioned at the lower stage, the specific display result "orange-banana-banana" is stopped and displayed. (2) is awarded, and when operated at a timing before (immediately before) the specific timing or after (immediately) the specific timing, “banana” as a display result different from the specific display result As long as “-banana-banana” is stopped and displayed in the replay (1), it is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment. For example, it is not a specific timing but before the specific timing (immediately before ) Or a specific timing when operated at a predetermined timing that is neither after (immediately after) the specific timing Shown as a result of or may be a reel control is performed so as to win the replay (2) "Orange - - Banana banana" is stopped and displayed. Even when configured in this way, when a player operates at a specific timing, a specific display result can be obtained when the player cannot actually operate at a specific timing and is operated at a timing before and after that. When a specific display result is derived when a different display result is derived and operated at the specific timing, it could not be operated at a specific timing depending on whether the specific display result is derived or not The effect similar to the effect mentioned above is produced.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, as a specific display result, the combination of replay (2) of winning combinations, that is, “orange-banana-banana” has been described as an example. However, the specific display result may be a combination of winning combinations different from the replay (2), and is not limited to a combination of winning combinations, and may be a combination of predetermined symbols.

  For example, when a combination of predetermined symbols that are predetermined display results is stopped on a specific winning line (for example, a horizontal line such as winning lines L1 to L3), the combination of winning symbols for replay is stopped. It may be a combination of off-line symbols that are stopped on a winning line different from a specific winning line (for example, diagonal lines such as winning lines L4 and L5). In the case of such a configuration, the reel control may be performed as follows in the game won for replay. When operated at a specific timing, for example, the combination of the replay winning symbols on the horizontal lines such as the winning lines L1 to L3 is stopped and the predetermined deviation on the diagonal lines such as the winning lines L4 and L5 is lost. Reel control is performed to stop the combination of symbols, and when operated at a timing before or after a specific timing, a combination of symbols for replay is derived on any of the winning lines. In addition, reel control may be performed so that a predetermined combination of off-line symbols is not stopped. Even when configured in this way, when a player operates at a specific timing, the player cannot actually operate at a specific timing, and a replay winning occurs when operated at the timing before and after that If the operation is performed at a specific timing, a replay winning is generated and a predetermined combination of outlier symbols is stopped and displayed on another winning line, so whether or not the combination of outlier symbols is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not the operation can be performed at a specific timing, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, as an end display result, a single bonus combination of winning combinations, that is, “banana-banana-star” has been described as an example. However, the end display result may be a combination of winning combinations different from the single bonus, and is not limited to the combination of winning combinations, but may be a combination of predetermined off-symbols. For example, when a predetermined winning combination is selected as the end display result, the predetermined combination of symbols of the predetermined winning combination is selected as a specific winning line (for example, winning lines L1 to L1). When stopped on a horizontal line such as L3), it may be a combination of off-line symbols stopped on a winning line different from a specific winning line (for example, diagonal lines such as winning lines L4 and L5).

  (31) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the display control circuit mounted in the production control board. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of the start of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the example of the storage area of the number of judgment values. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM in a game control board. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM abnormality error process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game control process which the control part in a game control board performs for every game. It is a flowchart which shows a BET process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a BET process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a payment process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a reel rotation process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a winning determination process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a payout process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process which the sub control part in an effect control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows an effect initial setting process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control recovery process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows production control interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect backup process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control process and a volume control process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of game production execution processing and navigation execution processing.

Explanation of symbols

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (5)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is derived to a variable display device that displays a plurality of types of identification information in a variable manner. In a slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
Before the display result of the variable display device is derived, the derivation of each of a plurality of types of winning display results including a re-game winning display result capable of playing the next game without using the gaming value is allowed. A pre-determining means for determining whether or not
Stop operation means operated by the player to stop the variation display of the identification information;
Derivation control means for deriving the display result of the variable display device according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation procedure of the stop operation means;
Re-game high-probability state control means for controlling to a re-game high-probability state for performing control for deriving the re-game winning display result with a higher probability than the normal gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The re-game high probability state control means ends the re-game high probability state when a predetermined end display result is derived in the re-game high probability state,
The derivation control means includes an end display result derivation control means capable of deriving the end display result on condition that a predetermined determination is made by the prior determination means.
The end display result derivation control means derives a special display result different from the end display result when the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing in the game in which the predetermined determination is made,
The derivation control means further includes a re-game winning display result derivation controlling means for deriving the re-game winning display result when the pre-deciding means determines that the derivation of the re-game winning display result is allowed. Including
The re-game winning display result derivation control means operates the stop operation means at the specific timing in a game in which it is determined that the derivation of the re-game winning display result is allowed instead of the predetermined determination . Sometimes, a first specific display result of the regame winning display results is derived, and when the stop operation means is operated at a timing before or after the specific timing, the regame winning display results Deriving a second specific display result different from the first specific display result ;
It is suggested that the slot machine is a game in which it is determined that the derivation of the re-game winning display result is permitted and whether the stop operation means can be operated at the specific timing. Characterized by a slot machine.   In the game in which it is determined that the derivation of the re-game winning display result is permitted, it further includes an effect executing means for performing a predetermined effect when the first specific display result is derived. The slot machine according to claim 1. When the end display result is derived, a special game that controls the next game to be a special game that performs control for deriving an advantageous winning display result among the plurality of types of winning display results with a higher probability than the normal gaming state. Game control means,
The re-game high probability state control means includes:
When the advantageous winning display result is derived, control to the re-game high probability state,
The re-game high probability state is ended when the end display result is derived in the re-game high probability state, and the next one game is controlled by the special game. Item 3. The slot machine according to Item 2. The special game control means derives, as the special game, a non-advantageous winning display result different from the advantageous winning display result among the advantageous winning display result and the plural types of winning display results with a higher probability than the normal gaming state. Control to the state to perform control,
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and is capable of deriving identification information in each of the plurality of variable display areas,
The derivation control means is determined when the pre-decision means determines that the derivation of the advantageous winning display result is permitted or when the derivation control means determines that the derivation of the non-favorable winning display result is permitted. In addition, a part of the advantageous winning display result is formed in a variable display area excluding one variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas, and a display result constituting a part of the non-favorable winning display result is derived. The slot machine according to claim 3, wherein: A game control board on which a wiring pattern is formed and has a connector that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern, and on which a means for performing control to advance the game is mounted;
The game includes at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game to the game control board and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game from the game control board. Electronic components,
A relay board having a first connector and a second connector for connecting a cable, and relaying signal input and output between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board;
A connector connected to the connector on the game control board side is provided at one end, and a connector connected to the first connector on the relay board side is provided on the other end, and the game control board and the relay board are electrically connected. A first cable connected to the
The has a connector connected to the relay substrate side of the second connector on the other hand to the end, and a second cable electronic component the game is connected to the other end,
Each of the connector connection part between the first cable and the game control board, the connector connection part between the first cable and the relay board, and the connector connection part between the second cable and the relay board is connected to the connector. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the slot machine is in a connection release restricted state that cannot be released unless the release restricted part related to is destroyed.

Images